atoxmll SEnibcrsitg tLiferatg. THE GIFT OP LONGMANS, GREEN & CO., j£^l^^*:^e^:ryy:C'*rr~^ / Cornell University Library arV16193 A practical German grammar. 3 1924 031 282 514 a Cornell University y Library The original of tliis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031282514 BY THE SAME AUTHOR A First German Book. With Exercises, Pieces for Trans- lation, Proverbs, Phrases, etc. 2s. dd, A Manual of German Composition. With Passages for Translation, 3^. Tales from History (Historische Erzahlungen). By Dr. Friedrich Hoffmann. Edited, with Notes. 2.s. Benedix's Dr. Treuwald. Edited, with Notes, etc. 2s. RIVINGTONS WATERLOO PLACE, LONDON i L« f. C9 i I r I ^^^S Messrs. LONGMANS, ^ GREEN, &- CO. having > purchased the old-established business ' of Messrs. RIVINGTONS, will i from this date supply most of the books hitherto published by that firm. /5 East 1 6th Street, New York. July, i8go. A PRACTICAL GERMAN GRAMMAR By H. S. BERESFORD-WEBB A Practical German Grammar, with Exercises in Continuous Prose. S''- Also sold separately, A Practical German Grammar, without the Exercises. 4J. German Exercises in continuous Prose, from ' A Practical German Grammar.' \s. 6a. RIVINGTONS WATERLOO PLACE, LONDON A PRACTICAL GERMAN GRAMMAR H. S. BERESFORD-WEBB LATE Assistant master at Wellington college RIVINGTONS WATERLOO PLACE, LONDON ti r? ?1 PREFACE It would be almost as remarkable and unusual for a German Grammar to appear without an apology as for a house to be built without a door, or a boat without a rudder — and no wonder, for, judging by the numbers already in existence, one would imagine that the supply was far in excess of the demand. But then it should be remembered that in every art, science, or manufacture, if there is no actual advance from day to day, at least there is ever a healthy striving after a better state of things — Set 2Kettf^ |>oft tmmer iBerkpvung. When an inventor announces a " new and improved " reaping-machine or printing-press, he does so in the hope and belief that it contains essential qualities which are absent from those of his predecessors, and he further designs it to meet the increased improvements of the age. And so it is with books, be they Grammars, Dictionaries, Guide-books, or Gazetteers. We perceive, from our own experience, what is lacking in those already in existence, and make a humble effort, in part at least, to supply the defect. viii Preface. I entertain the hope that some portions of this Gram- mar may supply a few points conspicuous by their absence from other works of the kind. They are the result, partly of my own experience, partly of numerous hints from former colleagues, among whom I desire to make special mention of Mr. H. 0. Steel, now Assistant Master at Winchester College, to whom I owe a debt of gratitude for his patience and care in revising the manu- script, and for many valuable suggestions. As regards the arrangement of the work, it will be observed that the Grammar is divided into two parts, printed respectively in large and small type. It is intended that the large type should be taken through first, with the Exercises on the same (Hxx. 1-66). This will give a general idea of the grammar, including a minor syntax, before the minuter details are entered upon. "With respect to the Declensions, the opinion of all whom I consulted seemed to be against the system of Weak and Strong Declensions, and I therefore adopted the division according to gender, deviating as it does but little from the favourite system of five declensions, as in Otto's Grammar, in the hope that it might enable the student to fix more easily in his mind the genders of the nouns, as it certainly is more convenient for reference. And here it may not be amiss to insert, a recommendation to private students not to make too Preface. ix great a point of mastering the rules for the declensions and the genders, as the numerous exceptions may only tend to dishearten them and to weary them of the language before giving it a fair trial. I have written rather amply upon the force and meaning of the verbal prefixes, and especially on the prepositions, — the former, because it wiU enable the student to understand more thoroughly and learn more rapidly the meaning of the compound verbs'; and the latter, because the prepositions are beyond doubt the hardest part of the language. In selecting examples, I have endeavoured, in most cases, to choose the easiest, and to keep in view the requirements of daily intercourse. My object is not so much to enable the learner to read and understand Lessing and Goethe, as to aid him in speaking and writing the language. I have given no full vocabularies to the Exercises, as they would only swell the size of the book ; and with Blackley and Friedlander's very excellent German Dictionary in their hands, students will be amply supplied with all the assistance they can require. The Examples, Exercises, and other portions of the book have been gone through carefully with Herr Theodor H. Dittel, Professor of German at the Eoyal Indian Engineering College, Cooper's Hill, and I am glad of this opportunity of thanking him for his help. Any sugges- tions and amendments will be gratefully received, if ad- dressed to me, care of the Publishers. H S B -W PREFACE TO THE NEW EDITION. In this New Edition of the Grammar the rules have practically remained unaltered, and there has been no change in the numbering of the paragraphs, but the exigencies of examinations have demanded an increase in many of the lists, though I must own I unwillingly admit such words as ber hotter and bie SSorloanb into a Grammar bearing the word " practical " on its title-page. The paragraphs illustrating the use of the Prepositions (§§ 296, 297, 298) have not only been supplemented, but rearranged as far as possible in a kind of alphabetical order, and the section on Foreign Nouns has been re- written. All this, it is hoped, will add to the usefulness of the Grammar as a book of reference. In addition to this, three new Exercises on the Prepositions have been added, and fuller vocabularies given to the preliminary Exercises. I have to thank many kind friends for their support, and for valuable hints drawn from their own experience. H. S. B.-W. August 18S8. CONTENTS GeBUAN HANDWBITINa, .... The Gbbman Language, . The Alphabet, Peonunoiation — (1) The Vowels (2) The Double Vowels and Diphthongs, (3) The Modified Vowels, (4) Lengthened Vowels, . (5) The Consonants, .... (6) Pronunciation of Foreign Words, (7) Capital Letters, .... (8) Division of Words into Syllables, (9) On f (8), ff, and ft, . PART I. The Parts of Speech. CHAPTER L Pbeliminaky — 1, _ Pbeuminaet — 2, CHAPTER n. CHAPTER III. PAOK rvii xiz 2 4 5 6 7 8 10 10 11 12 13 17 20 Contents. CHAPTER rv. Preliminary — i, , . . 22 CHAPTER V. (§§ 1-48.) Declension of the Noun, .25 Declension of the Noun, § 1. General Rules for Declension, § 2. Masculine Nouns, §§ 3-14. Feminine Nouns, §§ 15-17. Neuter Nouns, §§ 18-28. Compound Nouns, § 29. Double Plurals, §§ 30-32. Nouns used only in the Singular, § 33. Nouns used oiJy in the Plural, § 34. Singular in German — Plural in English, § 35. Plural in German — Singular in English, § 36. Compound Plurals, § 37. Anomalous Plurals, § 38. Nouns of Measure, Weight, etc., §§ 39, 40. Foreign Nouns, §§ 41-48. CHAPTER VI. (§§ 49-59.) Declension as Pbopek Nofns 50 Names of Places, §§ 49, 50. The Countries of the World, § 51. Names of Persons, §§ 52-59. CHAPTER VII. (§§ 60-68.)' Gender op Nouns, 57 Masculine, § 61. Feminine, § 62. Neuter, § 63. Compound Nouns, §§ 64-66. Female Appellatives, § 67. Double Genders, § 68. CHAPTER VIII. (§§ 69-97.) The ArjECTivii, 66 Declension, §§ 71-76. Notes on the Adjectives, §§ 77-83. Comparison of the Adjective, §§ 84-97. CHAPTER IX. (§§98-127 6.) The Numeral, 80 Cardinal Numbers, §§ 98-105. The Ordinal Numbers, §§ 106- 111. Indefinite Numerals, §§ 112-127 h. Contents, CHAPTER X. (§§ 128-144.) The Adjective Pronouns, 91 Demonstrative, §§ 129-131. Determinative, §§ 132-134. Relative and Interrogative, §§ 135-137. Possessive, §§ 138- 144. CHAPTER XI. (§§ 145-189.) The Pronouns, 97 Personal, §§ 145-159. Reflexive and Reciprocal, §§ 160-162. Demonstrative, §§ 163-165. Determinative, §§ 166, 167. Relative, §§ 168-175. Correlative, g§ 176, 177. Inter- rogative, §§ 178-181. Possessive, §§ 182, 183. Indefinite, §§ 184-189. CHAPTER Xn. (§§ 190-273.) The Verb, . . .... . . 117 Auxiliary : $a6e«, §§ 194, 195 ; Sein, § 196 ; SKJerten, §§ 197, 198. The Auxiliary Verbs of Mood, §§ 199-201. The Simple Regular Verb, §§ 202-204. Anomalies in the Spelling of verbs, §§ 205-208. Mixed Conjugations, §§ 209, 210. The Passive Voice, §§ 211-215. The Irregular (Strong) Verbs, §§ 216-224. Faictitives, § 225. Derivative and Compound Verbs, § 226, ff. Inseparable Verbs, § 230. Inseparable Prefixes, § 232. Separable Verbs, §§ 233-239. Separable Prefixes: Simple, §§ 240-242; Compound, §§ 243-245; Double, g 246. Prefixes Separable or Inseparable, §§ 247- 250. Neuter Verbs of Motion, § 251. $aacn, and Sei», §§ 252-255. Reflexive Verbs, §§ 256-260. Impersonal Verbs, §§ 261-273. CHAPTER XIII. (§§ 274-286.) The Adverb, 205 Comparison, §§ 276-279. Adverbs of Time, §§ 280, 281 ; of Place, § 282 ; of Degree, g 284 ; of Affirmation, Negation, Doubt, etc., § 285. Interrogative, § 286. xiv Contents. PAGE CHAPTER XIV. (§§ 287-298.) The Preposition, 213 With the Genitive, § 288. With the Dative, § 289. With the Accusative, § 290. With the Dative and Accusative, §§ 291-295. How to translate English Prepositions, § 296. Verbs, Adjectives, and Nouns, with Prepositions, § 297. Idioms with Prepositions, § 298. CHAPTER XV. (§§ 299-323.) The Conjunction, 258 Co-ordinative, g§ 300-305. Subordinative, §§ 306-318. Con- junctiona compounded, §§ 319-322. Adverbial, § 323. CHAPTER XVI. (§ 324.) The Interjection 270 PART II. Rules of Syntax. CHAPTER XVIL (§§ 325-343.) The Order of Words, 272 Principal Sentences, §§ 325-336. Subordinate Sentences, §§ 337-341. Compound Sentences, §§ 342, 343. CHAPTER XVIII. (§§ 344-348.) The Article, 281 CHAPTER XIX. (§§ 349-357.) Concord and Apposition, 286 Concord, §§ 349-353. Apposition, §§ ■354-357. Contents. xv CHAPTER XX. (§§ 358-392.) Use 01' TEE Cases 289 Nominative, § 358. Genitive, §§ 359-371. Dative, §§ 372- 383. Accusative, §§ 384-392. CHAPTER XXI. (§§ 393-402.) The Seven Auxiliaiiies op Mood, 308 Saimen, § 394. 3Raaett, § 395. aiucfen, § 396. a»uff«n, § 397. SoSeir, § 398. SSoUttt, § 399. Saffen, § 400. CHAPTER XXII. (§§ 403-412.) Use oe the Tenses, 316 CHAPTER XXin. (§§ 413-436.) Use op the Moods, , . 320 Subjunctive, §§ 413-415 and 422. Indirect STarration, §§ 416- 421. Imperative, §§ 423-426. Infinitive, §§ 427-436. CHAPTER XXIV. (§§ 437-444.) The Pabticiplks, 335 Present, §§ 437-438 and 440. English Gerundive, § 439. Perfect, § 441, Attributive Construction, § 444. APPENDIX A. The Pabticlbs - . . 343 APPENDIX B. List op Onomatopoetio Woeds, ... . . 353 APPENDIX C. The New Obthoobaphy 355 Index, ■ 357 ABBREVIATIONS. Fr. Feeytag. L. Lessing. G. Goethe. H. Heine. Im. Immeemann. R. Rattmbb, SOH, SCHILLEE. W. WiELAND GERMAN ^HANDWRITING Ca,pi,tais. hod. (lye, f (y^ (y h t (yj h ^ i iny rv o / p f (f r s t u, V w aa /Xr / /z SmaM Zetters. n- o p *K--^>^X^^^>^^^V''^^^ THE GERMAN LANGUAGE The German Language is a branch of the great Indo- Germanic family which had its home in Upper Asia, and from which Sanscrit and other Asiatic languages, and sub- sequently Greek, Latin, and the Slavonic tongues are also descended. Later on the Germanic branch split up into three great divisions : — (i) Germcm. (2) Gothic.1 (3) Norse (Danish, Icelandic, Swedish, and Norwegian). German again divided into — (i) High German. (2) Low German (Old Saxon, Anglo-Saxon, and Frisian). There were three chief periods of High German, called respectively — (i) Old High German (7th-llth century). (2) Middle High German (12th-14th century). (3) New High German (from the time of Luther, d. 1546, to the present day). ^ Valuable to the student of philology on account of a translation of the Bible by TJlfilas, a Gothic Christian bishop (360-380), the oldest work in a Germanic dialect. The German Language, Old High German was chiefly distinguisiied by its many inflexions. It had a Dual number, an Instrumental case, and twenty-five Substantive endings. Of Middle High German the principal dialect was the Swabian, the language of the court and of the Minnesanger. It wks distinguished mainly by the diminution of inflections, and consequently a corresponding increase of connecting words, such as prepositions, conjunctions, etc. At this period, too, the so-called ^anjletf^Jradbe, or official style, was developed, and formed the basis of the popular language. It is mainly to Luther and his writings that the Germans are indebted for purifying the language and establishing it in the form in which it now exists. On the whole, however, though Modem German is simpler and perhaps more rhythmical, yet it lacks the rich- ness and power of expression which characterise the ancient language. GERMAN GRAMMAR The Alphabet. Gekmas Lbptbrs. 21 a 33 b e c S b e c s 8 f © s k 1 m 3 i 3 j 2 t 2» m 31 n D Name (according to English pronunciation). ah bay tsay day ay eff gay hah ee yott kah ell emm enn The Alphabet. 3 p ^ P . pay q o q • • • • « coo r m r airr s @ f ^ ess t X t tay u u x\ 00 V as » . fow w 5B TO vay X 36 V iks y §) 9 . ypsilon z 3 S • ■ • . ts^tt Modified Vowels : 31 ci, t> 6, it ft. Compound Consonants : d) (ch), fd^ (sch), t^ (th), rf (ck), § (tz), f (ss). Pronunciation. Pronunciation. 1. The Vowels. 31, a long: like a.m father, as : laitn, Cxnal, Soger. short: has a similar sound, but must be inore slurred over : alt, 'i)at, Statu. Beware of pronouncing it as in the English hat. Q, t long : like ai in rail, as : Sle'^, jebeS, SEUe'^l. short : „ e „ let, as : 6effer, retten, ^Je^. 3, t long : like ee in sheep, as : wibcr, Siter, bit. short : „ i „ bit, as : 581^, ritten, ©i^. O, long : like o in soZe, as : SDo'^Ie, Sflot'^, ober. short : rather longer than the o in cost. Srofl does not rhyme with the English frost, nor with boasi, but comes between the two, as : 9locE, oft, fofl. U, It long : like u in rule, as : S^u'^rc, SDJutl, t|)ut. short: „ « „ full, as: ^unb, muf, Sdud. ' §), 9 occurs now only in foreign words and is pronounced like 3, t. Note. — Final e must always be sounded, as : ^§aut (pr. almost ha-out), ®d^auin, faul. et „ i in pike, as : Sflcife, .Seil, bein. eu ,, o«/ in boy, but more nearly approaching the i in pie, as : <§eu (between Aoy and hie), neu, ^(ulen. te „ ee in s/iee^j, as : 2)Jiene, tiiel. Pronunciation. 3. The Modified Vowels. Just as in English we form a few plurals of nouns and past tenses of verbs by changing the vowel of the root {e.g. man, men; draw, drew), and in Latin by changing that of the terminations {e.g. mensa, mensae), so certain changes of the same nature can take place in German by the influence of the e sound on the vowels a, o, u; SSoter becomes- SSncter, ttafe (1st pers.), ilaeft (3d pers.). This e was more usually written over than after the a, o, or u, and may still be seen in the names over shops, etc. It gradually degenerated into two dots, called in German the "Umlaut," or "changed sound."i In English this d 6 and it are usually termed modified vowels. The a of the diphthong au can also be modified. % a long : like a in hare, as : SIKct^re, fame, f^jat. -Distinguish between ne^me and ndljmf, je and j;d|, be^nen and ©dncn. short : the d sound is dwelt upon a little more than the short e sound, as : ^a^n, SWdnner, l^dngt. Compare ffdtte and geOe. £), 6 long : like French eu in pen, i.e. nearly like u in fur, but with the lips a little more compressed, as : 0J6t^e, fc^on, DI. short : approaches more nearly the long 6 than u in rut, as : S'ovfe, iijWic^, iSbffuung. li, it long : like the French u, as : fii:^Ien, SiJ^c, t^l short : more slurred over, as : fuCetl, ^luffe, SBriicEc. Su, au, rather more like op in boy than eu {see this), as: duper, Srdulein, ©dure. 1 The term "Umlaut" refers, properly speaking, to the sound itself, as pronounced, represented to the eye by two dots written over the vowel. It is now more loosely applied to the dots themselves. Lengthened Vowels, 4. Lengthened Vowels. a, e, are lengthened by doubling, as : ^aax, fc^cel, Soot. i is lengthened by an e immediately following, as : Siebe, jleben. All the vowels (i but rarely) can be lengthened — (a) by a following f), as: ma^Ien, ©el^ne, 5o|Ie, i^nen, SKu^me ; so also Wla^tit, <§6^le, re 3^r yoMr (the usual word) „ 3^re M. r. N. M. r. N. N. unfer unfer*e unfer t:^r t'^r'C i^r G. unfer*eg itnfer*er unfer«eg i^r=e^ t^r^er t^r*e« etc. etc. etc etc. Nouns are of all three genders. Most masculine and neuter nouns, to form the singular — (a) if of one syllable, add sc8 for the genitive and se for the dative ; (6) if of more than one syllable, add =S for the genitive only. Feminine nouns are indeclinable in the singular. Masc. Masct Fern. Neut. . the man. the brother. the woman, wife. the child. N. ber 2Kann ber ffiruber bte gran bag ttnb G. beg 3»anneg beg Sruberg ber gran beg ^tnbeg D. bem SKanne bem fflruber ber grau bem Sinbe A. ben aWonn ben SBruber bte gvau bag ^inb 16 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. I. ber fSattt, father iit ©o^n, son ber ^nt, hat bet SBautn, tree ber Xi^a^, table ber SEe)3^)i^, carpet ber SBagen, car- riage ber ©arten, gar- den hiX dia^mmf frame bte 2Wutter, mother bte S;oc()ter, daughter bte ©c^wejter, ststo- bte SBitrjet, roo< bte X^uxe, door, bte Seife, ceiling bie Siapete (zcaZZ-) paper bte gebev, pen bte SCfnte, ink ba^ aWabc^en, A. biefe ^arte geber 18 The Parts of Speech. [CbAV. H which green leaf? no new carriages N. tt)el(i>eg gruue 33(att N. feine neucn SEBagen G. wetd&eS grunen SBtatteS G. feiner neuen SOBagen D. mi^m grunen Slatte D. feinen neuen aSagen A. wetc^eg griine Slatt A. feine neuen SBogen Decline in the same way (see Vocabulary below) : the rich father such (a) good carpet that young man that old race many-a large garden the new house ■which narrow street 1 every low window this very low -wall these old carriages Present Indicative. i^ bin, / am ■ i(^ ^abe, I hive iHj tebe, / live tu btfl, thou art tu ^a% thou hast bu \ib% thou livest er if}, he is er ^at, he has er lebt, he lives Plural, Wtr ftnb, we are wix paben, we have mx leben, we live (i^r feib), i (i^r l^obt), i ymi, {i^x UU), ) ©iefJnb, 1^'^"^^ ©ie^aben,U.. ©ie leben! } ^'^ ^'^•'' (te ftnb, <% are ftc Jaben, <% Aaw fie reben, they live N.B. For the 2d person (of address) use the second plural form (@ie ftnb, ©ie paben, etc.), spelt always with a capital letter. Chap. II.] The Adjective. 19 Negatively. Interrogatively. Interrog. and Negat. tc|) bin nic^t fiabe i6) ? lebe ic^ mdf)t ? toix fmb ntc^t, etc. ^aUn mr? etc. leben wtr nt^t? etc. tebt ber ©o{)n? leben tie ^inber ni^t? The prepositions — bit, with, at the Iiouse of; intt, mth (i.e. together icith, etc.); (French cte) naiS), to (a place) ; »Ott, o/, /rom ; ju, to (a person) ; require the datim : bii meinem Dntel, at my uncle's bet bem ^\ti'\^tX, at the' butcher's. Words. ei-f it xei^, rich fommeit, to come nic^t, not gtO§, large ft^ejl/ ^o «*< fe'^r, very ftetn, smaK jTicE eit, to patch {a, yes eng, narrow btc ©tvo^e, ser, sAo«- aW, old person) maker ge'^en, to go bie ©tabt, afl— griebt etc. etc. td^ i)ak— nt(]^t gefiabt ^at er— nt^t gelebt? . The perfect participle (Qe^aht, gelebt) must be the last word in a sentence : 3c^ |»obe etn Simmer tn bem |)oteI Qt^ait. The prepositions — burt^, through; fur, /o»-j o^itc, without; gegeit, foMwris, against ; require the accusative : bur^ lai ^a\xi, o:^ne ein ^tnb. Chap, ni.] Some Adverbs— Words.' 21 je§t, now |)eute, to-daij gefiern; yesterday morgen, to-morrow balb, soon oft, often nt'e, we»er Some Adverbs. nur, only gar tttc^t, not at all ^^x, here b(J, there gefiem 2I6enb, yes- terday evening, last night ^ixxtt 9)?orgen, this morning ^eitte 2ibenb, this evening morgen 1 fri't^, to- morrow morning. morgen Stbenb, to- morrow evening. Nearly all adjectives can be used as adverbs. gut, good or well ^ubfd^, nice{ly), pretty, pirttily f(|ted|)t, had{ly) fc^on, fine, heautifulQy) how auf, on wte »tet? ttjie »tete? Aom many? me^rere, several tin, eine, one arm, poor tobt, ^ea<2 treu, faithful faul, Me WOEDS. gtanben, «fl' ic^ |)o6e— gem, / like; t^ :jia6e 3^ren 23ruber gem. [Exercise 7.] ber Sfef, ass ba^ gelb, (ploughed) field bte SBt'efe, M'. wiearfott; ber ©talf, stable ber @taUfned;t, ostler bag Out, /«»•??),, * Note that ^otitn= morning has a capital, movatn==to-morrow, a small initial. 22 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. IV. Chaptek IV. Preliminary— 4. Pluperfect Indicative. I had had t^ |)atte — ge'pabt bu battelt— ge^obt etc. t^ ^atte nx^i geleM, {>atten nid^t g«Ie6t ? Future Indicative. ii) werbe [etn, /s^M he t)\\ rotrft fetn, irb cv— ^aben? er wivb— ntc^t fein, bev 2)fann mxh in biefem ^aufe nti^t feben. Like the perfect participle, the infinitive comes last in a sentence. Chap. IV.] Order of Words. 23 Order of Words. The natural order of words in a Gerinan sentence is : 1. Subject. „ i Finite '■\ Verb. .Adverb (if „ J short), "•■i Object (if '^ short). . ( Object (longer). 1 Adverbs; (■p. Partic. 5. • or lufini- l tive. Ser ^ont'g The King 1 SWetn 5«effe My nephew He ttebt loves received has wtrb wiU fetn SSoIf his people gefiern yesterday i^n him i€ it ctnen 33rtef a letter in ber. ©tobt in the town nic^t not gefe^en seen glauben believe The most emphatic part of a German sentence is the beginning. Hence, generally for the sake of emphasis, but also for other reasons, Kos. 3, 4, and occasionally 5, can be placed at the head. This is most commonly the case with adverbs and their equivalents, and causes what is called Inversion, that is th^ transposition of the subject and finite verb. For example : — ^(if ^attc nte t>a€ ?!Jfeer gefei^en ; Sflie ^atU Of) ba^ 3Weer gefe^en ; 2)aS aWeev l^atte ii^ nte gefei^en ; and more rarely : — ®efe:^en ^attt Off t>ai SWeev nte. In English, inversion can only occur with certain words, e.g. Never have I seen a finer sight. In German it is absolute, "ajfovgen it^ werbe ge^en " is wrong. 24 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. IV. The prepositions auf, on, tn, m fiber, mer, above on, at S50r, before ttXltet, under, below and some others given hereafter require the dative when rest or remaining in, on, etc., a place — the accusative when movement into, on to, etc. (not in, on) — is implied :^ 3c^ jie^e auf bcm 'S>a(i)C, I am standing on the roof. 3^ jiet'ge auf buS 'S>a^, I climb on to the roof. Sr ft^t tn bem Garten, he is sitting in th-e garden. @f ge^t in ben ®axitn, lie goes into the garden. But er ge|lt in bcm Oavten would mean he is walking abmd in the garden, remaining there all the time — not going intc it from without. Words. wo? w/t«?-e? )(i^Mm, to gather ba^£)6ft,/m< loiel, much [egen, to put bev 06jigarten, aud^, also bte SSanf, bench orchard mi^,me(acc.) ttx ^>(ifd, ajaple t>ev^^, branch fie, tfjeni (ace.) tux ^)p^elbaum, aj>ple tree bet ^tm, arm ve(^t, right bev ©avtner, gardener bev SSeg, way Peonouns. N. id^, / bu, thou er, /se (te, sAe e^, i< D. mtr, to me btr, fo^A«e ijmt, to Aim ij)v, to her x\)xa, to U A. \nxi)f me t>i(^, thee t{in, him fte, Aer eg, if N. wir, we ©te, yafen ben iJcifen A. ben ^iagel bie 9tagel A. ben .^afen bie ^cifen In the same way: fSatiX, father.; £)fen, stove; 3Soge(/ bird; ^ammev, hammer ; ®axkn, garden ; ^InQti, toing. 4. The following add an tt throughout the plural, and do not modify : — fdantx, peasant^ (Sta^tl, sting 33aier, Bavarian 9J?uSfe(, mmcU SSetter, cmsin ^^antoffet, sli-pper ©eootter, godfather Softer {pi. *en), doctor ^iad^tar, neighbour ^rofejfor {pi. *en), professor ^ Plural : SSauern, a)?iigfetn, 3laA)iax'n, etc. 5. The following are more commonly found without the final n in the nominative singular (griebfr formerly grieben), ^ SSmn, a builder, is regular ; e.g. Drgeltauev, organ-builder {pi. <6aiiev). ^ fflin the plural take 9iettev and fSauev, 9iaiJ^6m and Btaititl, JPitntaffel and SBaietr. fSfinStel and Siottov, spxafeffor, ®ti)ttttev. By godjather best is translated the latter. 28 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. V. but are declined as if it were still there. None of them modify. gviebe, -peaM ©ebanfe, thmgU 9tame, name gunfe, spark ®tau6e, Ulkf ©ante, seed geB, roch ^aufe, heap mm,wui^ N. ber ©taubc (®Iauben) N.x G. beS Otaubeng ^' >®Iau6en D. bent ©tauben D. p' D. ben ©lauben A.) \Exerd&e 10.] 6. It was stated in § 3 that masculines in »cl, 'Cn, and >er modified the root-vowel. ' This is the case with the commonest nonns of this class. The following do not modify : — SlMer, eagU f)oiei, joiner's plane •QnUl, uncle amcrifaner, American Sanjter, cTiamxUor Orben, order of chivalry 2(nget, common Saflen, box ^ubel, poodle Stnfer, anchor fiatet, tom-cca fHaC^in, jaw {Sg.) %taUt, Arab Stumpcn, lump fRa^men, frame tSalten, beam Snoc&en, bone SRanjcn, «a(cAe« Sogen, arch Snoten, knot ©fatten, shadxne Srunnen, toell, spring .Coffer, truni; (box) ©ommer, summer Suifcl, hump Sragen, coUar ©trubcl, whirlpool Sufen, bosom Su^en, mie S;ro))fen, drop Saitmen, iftamft ?appen, sheet, pall SSSagen, carriage Srogoncr, dragoon WlaQtn, stomach SBaljcr, JoaKz ©oumen, gum {in fSlaM, blemish 3apfen, top Tnouth) 9Jadcn, neck (back 3uber,3Mti2 |>offn, hook of) and aU nouns in «et derived from verbs and denoting an agent, as : ?KaIer, paitOer {hom molen), SeWO^net, inhaHtarU ; ©lafer, glasaer; ^fotrer, parson ; %m^iX, diver. ' With n throughout all cases spell. And S in singular as well : @ebanfe, ®Iiin6e (faith), and 9tiime, $aufe, Sriebe (peace), and Same, 3SiUe (wUl) and geld (a roci], With Sunfe (spark), complete the stock. Some add Sut^fJate, a letter of the alphabet, but Heysb declines it like iBrte (§ 13). * The bone qfafish is lie ®tatt §§ 7, 8.] Masculine Nouns, 29 Monosyllables and Derivatives. 7. These add se to form the plural, and modify. Example of a monosyllable : — the head. Singular. Plural. G. beS topfeS ber Sti^jfe D. ' bem ^opfe ben Kopfeit A. ben ^o^f bie ^opfe In like manner : ^VLt, hat; Satt, ball; Stocf, coat; ^lal^, place, square. 8. Most of the derivatives are formed from monosyllables or monosyllabic roots by adding a prefix, as : SSotfaK; occurrence (hom gatt); 33egrijf, idea (from ©rtfif). Example : the song.' Singular, Plural. N. ber ©efang bie Oefaiige Gr. beS ®efan9(e)d ber Oefdnge D. bent @efan9(e) ben ©efcingen A. ben.®efan3 bte ©efange In like manner : S3efel^t/ order; SBeretn, vm,ion, assembly; SluSbrucE, ea> pression ; Slnjug, suit {of clothes) ; SSerluf}, loss ; S3ertcf»t, report; SStWti^, proof. ' Properly the singing (an act) ; tJie song (words and music) is tin* Sirt. 30 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. V. 9. Other derivatives are formed by adding a suffix such as stg, 4^, *tng, etc., as: ^ont'g, king; Sperling, sparrow; Xtppii^, carpet. Plurals : ^ontge, ©perttnge, Zep'pi^e. So also : 3)ionat, rrumth; §l6enb, evening; ©C&tUtltg, shilling; ®an^tx\(^, gander ; itii^nam, corpse ; ^abii^t, Jiawk Plurals : OKonote, Slfieitbe, ©d^ttttnge, etc. 10. The following do not modify the vowel : — (a) Exceptions to § 7 : Slvm, arm .6unl>, dog 9?uf, call Sa^S, badger ia^€, salmon ©(^Up, shoe Xio6)t, wick ?aut, sound ©toff, stuff 13oI(^, dagger ^fab, 'path Sag, day @rab, degree ^\(i\X, peacock 3oK, ««<;Ai ^llf, hoof ?5unft, ^oini, (^oi, full stop Further, the less oonunon words (given for reference) : Sift, act (drama) $auc^, Ireath ©c^atf, rogite SSorb, ftoriier ^Ot^, jungle ®^i\iS., draught Sorn, well, spring Snatt, report ®i)X(>t, shot, grain Som, cathedral Sw^n, crone (for lifting) ©l^uft, scamp Srutf, pressare^ Su(!^g, lynx ©trauf, osinc/t Sorfl./oresi 9Rot(^, salamandeD- ©unb, sound, strait ®UXt, girth ^Ot (geogr.), poZe %a\X,rope §oft cla^p ^uIS, pulse Saft, (music), JeaS, tor' f)0lin, siaZi- ©cjat^t (mining), s7io/!! Scroti, ttrojie iVote. — A double vowel does not modify, as : Slal, eel, pi. Sale ; except in ©not, haU, pi. Sflte; baS 5l(i8, Sfer (pZ. rare), camoK. ' airm and Sng with $un& and 3)a$§, Sunt and @cai> with !|3f au and Sad^S, Further, 8oU (an mc/j) and SH«f , 3)oI(Q (a dagger), ^oHjt and $uf, !Pf ab and spuitft with S^ttlg and Stoff , In plural leave the "Umlaut" off. " The compounds are modified : Stnbvude, impressions ; SluSbvudc, expressions, etc. * iBen Soft f(^tagen=io beai time, %(ilt^iii=baton. §§11,12.] Masculine Nouns. 31 (6) Exceptions to § 8 : SBeruf, calling; 33eflt(^, msit; aSerfll^, attempt; ®e« mo^)\, husband ; 2lntt)att, attorney ; ^itvat, wnament. Plurals: 33eviife, 33efu^e, SBevfu^e, ©eina^^Ie, Slnnjatte, 3tevate. 11. Twelve add ^tx and, if possible, modify ;;— 33ofett)td^t, villain SlJJann, man SOBalb, wood, @etjl, ghost, spirit Dvt, place forest ®titi,~God ^m'^fedge Wmm, worm Setb, body SBormunt), guardian 3rvt^uni, error (by a will). 9tetC^t|>um, rjcte^ [Exercise 11. J 12. The following add sen : 315n, ancestor 2)Jaf}, mas« ©taot, sioJc (polit. ) ©orn, ini, interest (money)' Sorter, laureP ^ Also spelt Sicciit^ ; sometimes found as a feminine with the plural 3icvat(5)eii. 2 Add in plural m to @eifi. Set*, mann, S>xt, SRnit*, aSalb (a wood), aSotmtnti), SBofctoiii^t and aaSiivm, SReii^t^um, ^ri^ltm, @ott (a god). ' Or bie Sortccct, pi. Sorteetcn. * Genitive singular S^mEvjeS or ©cj/merjenS ; in compounds the latter, as ©^imetjcnStuf, cry of pain. ^ These will take in plural a bes Soteit ber I „ . D. bem SBoten ben C A. ben S3oten bte ^ In the same way: ^na6e, boy; Stffe, monkey; |>afe, hare. The only exception is: Safe, cheese; genitive, be^ ovuivw, plural, Safe (dative plural, Safen). Those in the list § 5 are not properly exceptions. 14. In the following the final c of the nominative has been dropped, but they are declined as if it had been retained : 25dr, bear .^etb, hero ^axt,fool (J|lri|i, christian &ixx, gentleman, Mr. Oi^g, ox ^int, finch ^ixt, herdsman ^xitli, (royai) prince jjur jl, prince 9J?enf(i^, man (homo) S^pOV, fool ®xaf, count Tl0%Moor ^OX^a'^X, forefather^ Add |)03e jiolj, bachelor ; ®t^iU, fellow ; Oeno^, companion. ^tXX takes «n only in the singular, sen in the plural: singular (G. D. A.) ^ixxn, plural .^erren. [Exercises 12, 13, and 67.] ' m throughout take ®mf and SBiit, $ea and Siivfi/ $ti»j, SKenf^ and ^ett. With SWo^e and $irt, to swell the list, CiQS, asocfa^c, SinI (aTincA) and €$rift. Then S^ov and JRatc, nor fail to leam That $exc in singular has $eim. §15.] Feminine Nouns. 33 B. Feminine Nouns. 15. The declension of feminine nouns is simple. They do not change in tlie singular.^ Polysyllables, with very few exceptions, take in the plural stt, or if euphony requires it, sCtt. Monosyllables, with thirty-one exceptions, take =en.^ the deed- X^at Plural. bte , ber f ben j bte ' SE^aten the island— Plural. 3nfe(n ©c^Iad^t, hatlle, @(^Tac[;ten geber, pen, gebern Sranf^eit, Uhms, ^vanf^etten grage, question, '^xa^txi |)ofnung, hope, |)offnungeu '^a^xx^i, mws, DfJa^vic^feii So also : gttnte, gim; grow, wife; Sltauer, wau,- UIjv, watch, 3a|)t, nwmher. ' ' They used to be declined and take an =«. This survives in a few expressions: an^^titn, on earth; iyx&m^tn,infavoiir{of); ftonScitcn, on the part (of); s« e>)te», in honour (of); su SiftonSen, to shame ; bpii ®oite9 ©nnSen, by the grace of Ood (Dei gratid). 2 3)ic @ee, sea, only adds n, pi. ®een. C 34 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. V. 16. The thirty-one monosyllables add =c and, if possible, modify. They are : Slngji,^ anguish ^aut, sMm, hide 'iRai)t, night SJrt, axe Stuft, cleft 3la^t, seam aSanf, bench Kvaft, power 'iftot^, need Srattt, bride ^u^, cmv 3tll^, nut SSruji, breast .Kunji, art ©c^nur, lace, string %au%Jist imi,lotise @(i)tt)urfi (©ef^wulft), ^XVLi^t, fruit ^ Suft, air swelling ®ani, goose ^n\i, pleasure ^taiit, town ®ruft, mult SRac^t, might USailb, (inside) wall ^anb, hand 3 SlJJogb, maid. iffiurfi, sausage 3Raug, mojfse 3unft, g'MiZ(i* Plurals : SSrciitte, ^axCot, ©c^niire, etc. Further, the compounds of jjluc^t, SBruiiji: 3litgpcl;te, evasions; ^mtxiivM^t, conflagrations ; and of sfunft (verbal noun from fommen, lo come): S^^f^vaxnnxtixn^it, meetings/ ©nfunfte, income. ' 3n 9'lngjlen, inperpleanty ; tntnufcnb Sngjleii, in a peck of troubles. ^ Common garden fruit is iai 06ft (no pi.). S^tti^t is used In all other senses and figuratively. Do not therefore say, like the young English lady learning German : ajietne JBemui^uugen luarcn obftrpS (but ftn^tloS), my efforts were fruitless. ' The hands of a watch are Seiger, m. * arjt and aittflft with SBnitf and SBrtift, SBxaut and Snaft with Stiii^t and Suft, @anS and n\u\t, $aut and @mft, Uta\i and S9In(l)t, ^^ and 9ta(^t, Sunft and Suft with aHogb and 8on8, 9Jt)tft and Shift with Stabt and Wlan^, aiojt with Si^nuc (a thread) and jpnnti, Srfjiuitlft (a swelling, tumour), SSnni), SSSiii-ft and Siinft in plural -.t With vowel modified we see. §§ 17, 18.] Neuter Nouns, 35 17. All feminines in sttiff, by analogy with the neuters in *nt§, take «e. These are the exceptions referred to above. (For list, see Genders § 62, 5). ^enntnt^, knowledge, ^eitnttliffe; Seforgni^, apprehension, SWuttev and-Soclter are irregular, pi. TlixtUv, SEoc^ter, [Exercises 14 and 15.] C. Neutek Nouns. No Change for the Plural. 18. (i) Those in scl, sClt, 'Ct, These, like the masculines of the same terminations, merely take the ?n in the dative plural. the sail. the victim. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. N. tia€ @egel bte ©egel N. bag D^jfer bte Opfer G. beg ©egetg ber ©eget G. beg Dpferg ber Dpffv D. bein ©egel ben ©egein D. bem D)3fer bett D^jfevti A. bag ©egel bie ©egel A. bag D)5fer bte Opfev The only one which modifies is bag Stofier, the convent, pi. bte mi^cx. In like manner, aKejJer, to/e; Sajier, vice; 3et^en, sip'w; Ufer, SamS; SBunber, miracle-,, Sagev, cawjp. Diminutives are formed by suffixing s(|ert and 4etn. These are all neuter, and belong to this declension. bag ^Opft^en, the little head; 33ad^tetn, rivulet; 9J?db C^en (diminutive of SUJagb), the girl; %xa\xkin, young lady, Miss, pi ®o})f(^en, 33a(|)(ettt, etc. 36 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. V. 19. (2) The following collectives : — ®e6aube, building ©ewerbe, industry ©emdibe/ painting OettJolbe, mult ©{btrgt/ mountain range Plural : (^tlaViOt, ©emalbe, etc. Plural in set with Modification if possible. 20. (i) Most of the monosyllables (see below, §§ 23-25). the valley. , the picture. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. N. bag X\)a\ bte 2;j)afer N. bag SUb bte ©irber G. beg SC^ateg ber Stealer G. beg SBilbeg ber Stlber D. bemS^oIe bertSC^alern D. bent Stibe ben Sttbevn A. bag Z^oX bte SC^dler A. bag 33ttb bte ®tlber In like manner : SBIatt, leaf; di, egg; ®m, glass; ©d|)Io§, castle. 21. (2) The six following collectives with the prefix ge= :— @ima(^, chamber ®t^(^t,/ace ©entut^, mind ©cfpcnfl, ghost ©Cf^lci^t, gender, sex ©CWfltlb, garment. Plural : ©entailer, ©emiitjcr, etc. 22. (3) Those ending in st^Uttt : — fiontgt^um, kingdom; 5B(«tpUm, hislwpric. pi. S6nigt5iimcr, SSiStJiimcr. So also: 8iitf}entpum,pr»»c8pai%; |)erjogtJum, ducAy. [Exercise 16.] §§ 23, 24.] Neuter Nouns. 37 Plural in »c. No Modification. 23. (i) The following monosyllables : — ba^ Sdeet, flower-bed bai 30(^, yoke bal SKet^t, right 23etl, hatchet Sinn, c^im 9ie^, roe-deer 25etn, % Snte, tee 9letd^, empire SBoot, 6oa< Sreuj, cross 9tof, charger S3rob, Jreac? i Soog, fo<, Wfer^/ ©c^Wetn, ^(^ ®e(f, (^ec^ &S«i ' @tud, piece 'S^in^, thing (see ^aiitime^ fSlk^, fleece § 30) 9JJaf , measure * SBerft, wAar/s gett, sfe, We (of 3tH^, net SBerf, icori "• animals) 3lid, rivet ^elt, tent ^t^, festival ^^ix\>, horse B^ug, «<«*/ ^eft, handle ^ ^ult, (^es^ 3iel/ S'"*^ Plural : SBccte, ?5utte, Wtak, etc. 24, (2) A few in *r, to avoid the juxtaposition of two r's. bog ^aax, havr bag 5Weer, sea bag aSoor, moor 3a^r, yeajr X'^kx, animal ^aar, ^air .^eer, army S^or, g-a^e 9?0^r/ reed, pipe Plural : ^aare, 3al)re, S^iere, etc. (.f)aarev would be harsh.) ^ ' Sie ffifokc, roJfe. " From 5eften, Z. * / Aa»e learnt by heart 50 words (SSJortcr). His words had a great effect (aSorte). A dictionary =^ottetbui^. The compound ©Vti'Ja'OTt, proverb, takes -loijciei:. 31,32.] Double Plurals. 41 Note. — SHann itself, and especially its compounds in a collective sense, take in the plural Seiite (icn(lteutc But if it is necessary to distinguish the sex, use »mftnnev, as e^cmnnn, hiuiband, ®5emiinncc. The English people, when meaning several individuals, is Scute, when meaning a nation, 35ctf, n. ; I met several people in the park ( = ficute). The Germans are an industrious people ( = S5off ). 31. Many names of materials can take a plural to denote different kinds of the said material. These plurals are regularly formed by the addition of se without modification : baS |)ars pi. |>arje, resins „ ©atj ©atje, salts ,, WtOOS Ttooft, mosses in saSein SBeine, wines 32. Hence many nouns have two plurals according to meaning : ba« $orn fiijrner, horns §)otne, hinds ofhom „ SU($ Silver, dotlis {e.g. neckcloths, eto.^) Su^e, hinds of cloth ber Sob 2;obf^fat(e, cases of death Sobe, hinds of death ©r ilatb ben f(^recf£ii|f}en attcr Sobe. He died the most terrible of all deaths. [Exercise 68.] ' .6ei5. ajrfZera bie flOC^jeit, nuptials eine §Ofe (§ 34, note), a pair of trousers ber SnJflW/ contents ber Subel, r^oidngs ber Se^rii^t, sweepings my ber Setter, staggers bie Somtnobe, cftes* of drawers bie Sunbe, iitiOTgrs bie Surfi»f(^rift, jtoiics ba3 Sojn, wa,ges bie 5[Wat?)emati!, maihematics^ bie STOeerenge, s^raite ba^ 5Kittet, means bad 2)?ittelatter, Jlfiddie ^jres bie 3lo4>Iefe, gleanings bie 9ta^r{(|t, »eM)s eine ©4^'"^*' <*y*'' of scissors ber ©pat, spavins bie Sreppe, stojrs boS liberbleibfel, leavings bie fibernto4)t, od^ bie Umgegcnb, environs bad Unfraut, lueecis bie Uniform, regimentals ber 35crba(t)t, sMspJcitms bie Sefper, vespers bad SJie^, caM2e eine SGSage, a pair of scales ba3 SBappen {coat of) arms eine Sange, apair of tweezers ein Sittel, m., a pair of com- passes ber Subejor, belongings spectacles=mnnt Sritte (not Sritien). I. Plueal in German— Singulae in English. 36. gOrtWritte (better than singular), progress (cf. French les pro- gris) ; SeiintniiTe, knowledge ; 3infen, interest ; ©^laden, slack, dross ; Soiien, expense ; Srafte, strength (cf. French forces) ; firottlpfe, cramp ; Tl6it\{n), furniture. " (See also above. Festivals, etc., and Diseases.) 1 And other sciences, kit SPoliti!, SKeii^anif, etc. 2 Or in the singular, iat or We aSoiel. 44 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. V. K. Compound Plurals. 37. Some nouns (mostly abstracts) do not admit of the formation of a plural, the equivalent to the English plural being usually a com- pound word : bcr S5unb, alliance SiinbnifTc, alliances bie @5re, honour SJrcnbejcugungcn, honours bic ®m^, favour ©unjlbejcugungen./aTOurs taS Scben,! life 5Wenf($ciitcben, lives bag Sob, praise SoBe«er$e6ungen, praises bcr 3Rotb, murder iKorbt^aten, murders (SKotbe, rare) ber diai^,' advice Slat^f^ltagt, counsels bet SRegen, rai» SJcgcngiifTe, m»B« ber Sanb, sand ©anbbfinfe, sands^ ber ©cjncc, s»oio ©^necmaffcn, snows bcr ©frett, dispute ©ttetttgfeiten, disputes bag Ungliid, rnvforimie. UngliicfgfaJte, misforiunes ber ^anf, quaiTel 3(infcreien, disputes L. Anomalous Plurals. 38. ber 21m6of, o»n«7, Slmboffe ber 3ltta«, atUs, SlttoiTe ber 8au, building, Saue (rare), Sautett, or ©ebaube bag SIcinob, jeweZ, Stetnobten, or Steiiiobe baS Setgniigen, pleasure, being a verbal noun, has no plural: use the plural of bie SSergiiiigung, SBergniigungen. So also of 3(ncrbtetcn, offer; SSerge^en, offence; SSerfprec^en, promise; Untcrne^men, undertaking; all neuter. The plurals, 3lnet= bictungen, Serge^ungen, Serfpret^ungen, are most used. Further : bet ©egeii, blessing, ©egnungen. ' They sacrificed their Zfecs =®tt oi'fcvtcii baS Seien (not bie Seiien). 2 SRnt;^, a councillor, pi, SRatl^e. ^ "Goodwin Sands, gcfd]5vad;c Snnbbiiirte on btt Jtiijle kcr engtiftl^tn (Svaffc^nft Rtnt" (Spamer, Gonveirsations-Lexicon). The sands by the sea-side is ict Stiaiii. § 39.] Nouns of Measure, Weight, etc, 45 M. Nouns of Measure, Weight, Etc. 39. Masculine and Neuter substantives denoting a number, weight, or measure are not declined when preceded by a numeral (definite or indefinite) : je^n (5ug fang, lOfeet long etn @Ia^ aBaffev/ a glass of water Such nouns are : bo6 35ud^, guire — funf 33uc^ ?5a)M'er, 5 quires of paper ber Sentner, hundredweight— ^i^n Centner ^o^feii, 10 cwt. of coal ber ®rab, degree— ^wHi^ ®rab aSanne, 12 degrees of heat bag ©ramtn, gramme— l>xtx ©ramm '^^t^tx, three grammes of pepper bag Sunbert, hundred— >etn gonjeg ^unbert ©d^afe, a bag 2!aufenb, thousand — J whole hwn&red of sheep ber 9Kanii, mara— 600 SWanii Snfonterte, 600 foot tie 3Warf, marh—ti fofret bag ^funb 4 3Korf, the price is 4 marks a pownd bag 9Kof, measwr6—%^t\ Wo.^ ^O^annt'gbeeretl, 2 measures of currants bag 9Weter, wiefre— mei^rere Tletex Seinwanb, seweroZ mefr«s o/ bag ^aar, jpair— brei faax ©ocfen, stairs of socks bag .?5funb, ^omim? — SJter ^funb %U\^^, 4 Zfo. of meat bag Slteg, rgoOT — fo Utete 9?teg ^Jflpter, so many reams of paper tag ^StM, piece — etite SDfanbel ^at 15 ©tnat (G.), ju Snft, mit Ste^t, 3U Sifii^ (or Sifi^e), tin Sing son @oft (but Mm teinjlen @oIbe), son Sag ju Sag. But generally : ju ^nufe, gu ©tnnte Sringen (^^^'^<'^"' A. ben Hbbofaten btc i 42, 43 ] Foreign Nouns, 47 In the same way : — bet ?(flt011Cm, astronomer SJutoftat, autocrat Stufomat, automaton Sdathax, barbarian (Janbibat, candidate ©annibat, cannibal SontpOniP, composer ©Cfpot, despot ©Icfant, elephant ®rem(t, hermit ^Ufar, hussar Sefutt, Jesuit Rnttf, caliph Somerab, comrade Sat^Oltf, cailwlic Segat, feg'Qjie 3Monar^, monarch (a) Male beings. bcr ^nttent, ijajjcmj 55§ttofOp5/ philosopher $ JOtOgrap^,' photographer ^tatat, isreZate ^rcifibent, president ^XO'p^iii prophet Slefrut, recruit ©olbat, soldier ©fubent, student S^eolog, theologian t'fXmn, tyrant Ungar, Hungarian SSagatunb, vagabond SJafaH, vassal 3ar, csar- (5) Things without life. bet Sonfonant, consonant ber Somet, come* Siamant, diamond Sufat, dMcai and others of similar terminations. planet, planet OuOttcnt, quotient 43. The following take =8 in the genitive singular, and sCtt through- out the plural : — (a) Names of males in unaccented -.ot : as, Sottor, ?i«fcffor, 2tutOr, etc. ; genitive be^ ©OftOt^ j plural IToltOten ; also donfut, consul ; plural Sotifiitn : except Tlaicx, Senor, plural =ore. ^ The photograph is tie Sp^otoiivniJ^ie ; so also with ©eogvnv^, geographer, and OeogriHiljic, geography. 48 The Parts of Speech. [Ohap. V. (5) The following things without life:^ bag Snfeft, insect bet @^a))aun, capon bcr ^folm, pscUm bag @taiut statute bag SSerb, verb 44. (a) A few names of male beings take * in the pinral, i.e. the following and those of similar terminations : — ber Actional, shareholder Saron, laron Sifi^of (»5fe), bishop ©onbucteur, conductor ^etolb, herald ©encrat (=ale), general SuWtlittijetaetter SanonitX, gtinner bet SafleQan, castellan ^otolb, gobUn S.XOiOtixi, crocodile aKarf(5aII (»atte), marshal ^affagier, passenger ^Otron, patron (6) To this mode of declension belong also aU maacnline and nenter nouns denoting inanimate objects, except those before mentioned, §§ 42 (6) and 43 (6) and a. ie\r given in the next paragraph. Such are: — Masculinb. bcr Salcon, balcony @^anal (-aU), canal (5ompa§, compass effeft, effect ST^agnet, magnet 3)?0ment, moment SWoroli («afie), marsh 9?oman, novel Singular, singular %txltext 2:ractat, treatise Surban, turban and others by analogy. Neuter. bag attentat, attempt (on life) Concept, rough draft Sueff, dnd @rttem, extreme gormat, shape USagajin, shop, store 37{anufcri))t, manuscript Object, object ^adet, packet ^rogramm, programme Seftament, loiU @{>in))tOnt, symptom [46-48.] Foreign Nouns. 49 45. Those in =ium and a few others take n (-en) :— bic Sjtonif, chronicle bte ^etfon, person ©tSpoltttOn, disposition SBelobte, melody @icet(enj, Excellency SWojeftat, majesty §pperbct, hyperbole 9)?anier, manner Plurals : S^tonifen, ^erfonen, etc 48. French and English nouns usually retain their plural in sS : — bag Sittet ticket bag Soup^, compartment ber S^amptgnon, mushroom bie Sui^P/ i"*"?/ ber S^cf, chief, principal bei Sorb, fer-ti ber Slub, cZm6 ber SBSJig, whig bag Setail, (2etoi2 Plurals : SdiUiti, Sctottg, Surieg, etc. as also nouns in ca and lO : — ber $apo, papa bag @i^c, echo bog ©cfa, sofa Plurals : ®ofag, etc. [Exercise 70.] 1 Siqjttal, capital of a column, has ScHJitatev. The chapter of a book is tins Sotitet, pi. Sn))itel. 2 A gymnasium is Surnnnpatt, /. D 50 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. VI Chapter VL Declension of Proper Nouns. A. Names of Places. 49. If masculine or neuter, they take =§ in the genitive : Berlin. Germany. N. 33erltn N. Seutf(t»Ianb G. SSerling G. Seutfi^Ionbg D. 35erKtt D. 25eutf(^Ianb A. SBerltn A. Seutf^tanb unless they end in i, g, x, or j, when, to express the genitive, the preposition COn with the dative must be used : 2)ie ©tvagen »on ^axii, the streets of Paris. S)te Stnwo^ner SJOn dabix, the inhaUtants of Cadiz. The plural remains unchanged : S)ie jroet granffuvt, the two Frankforts. 50. If feminine, they are, like common nouns of this gender, not declined, and are preceded by the definite article. Switzerland. Moldavia. N. Die @4)Wetj N. bte aKolbau G. ber @^tt)eij G. ber SKotbau D. ber ©rteiipc ©rogbntantiien Great Britain ©ngtatib - Englamd engtiff!^ ©nglanbcr ©^ctttonb Scotland f^ottiW ©*otte (®4)0itin) Stianb Ireland iriW Srtonbcr §oUanb Holland boHanbifc^ ^oaanbcic Statien Italy itotienifc^ Stalicner 9liebfrlanbe (bte) Netherlands niebertanbtfct; 5Riebertdnber 3?ortbegcn Norway tiortBcgifd^ Sfcrroeger £)|ierrcti& Austria i^txtt^ift^ £>fl:encic^ej: Portugal Portugal portugtcfifc?) ^Sortugicfe aiuflanb Russia tuffif* giuffe Oiufftn) ©(^weben Sweden f^tbebif^ ©^wcbe ©^ttjcij (bte) Simtzerland fcfeiBeijerif^ ©cpweijcr ©panien Spain franif^i ©panier ZMii (bie) Turkey tMtf(!& Surfe IRom, ii 'ome, romifi^. 1 The feminines, except Scutfdj) (see below), are formed by adding «in and cutting off a final anin. ^ Really an adjective and declined as such : i>er Setttfdpc, bie Scutfc^e (/■.), ein !Beutf(!^6r, bie Sexitf^cn (pi.), SDeutfcJSic, Germans. 52 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. VL (6) Asia. (Sliten, aftattf^, 2lfter.) COUNTKT. Akjectivjs. Inhabitant. Sttabien jlraJia atobiW Slraber e^tna 1 China f^ineitf^ gjtnefe Snbicn India inbif# Snbict* Sapan Japan iapanif^ ( Sapaner ( Sapanefc ?etitcn Persia petnW ?«fcr .^tetnaften, Asia Minor. (e) AinicA. (afrifa, afrtfantfc^, Slfrtfaner.) tQp^itn Egypt \ agpptife^ | Sgppter abj>iTiiiieii,-l!a« Sap ber @uten ^offnung, «Ae Cape of Good Hope. (d) America. (Slmertla, amerifanifi^, Slmerifaner., Sie SSercinigtcn ©taaten, «Ae t/^«tItanet). 3Jorl)»3lmerifa, ©ub»Slmctifa. Sefitnbten (sin^.), the West Indies. aufhalten, ouftraltf^, aufhtalter. bet ottantifc^e Ocean, tlie Atlantic. bo« ftitte STOeer, the Pacific. bag mittettanbif^e 3)?cer, a D. «Ra{ieI A. Sevt&a A. SRa^et 54 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. VL Except those ending in «e, which (like masculines in s^, etc.) take «en^ and (iXl. Lottie. Mary. N. ?otte N. mark G. gotten^ G. 3Warten(5 D. gotten D. gWarten A. Sotte A. Tlaxit In the same way, ?, (bag) grauletn 9». 57. God. _@ott ®ott ®ott Jesus Christ. N. ycfug ef;rti}uS G. 3efu E^rtfli • D. 3efu S^rtjlo A. Sefum S^rijlum a?ore^riHt®etnn:t=-B.C. gja^ „ „ =A.D. Abbreviated into 23ot dl^r. ®e6., etc. 58. Proper names are of course but rarely vised in the plural. When they are, they denote several individuals of the same name or quality : e.g. the eight Henrys, several Olceros (i.e. several orators like Cicero). These plurals are formed in German as follows : — (1) Names of men ending in a vowel (except »0), or in »el, »en, 'Cr, and the diminutives in »c^en remain unchanged. bie ©cfittter, ©oet^e, ficgel, etc. (2) Other German names of men take »e. bie Seffinge, ^axU, etc. (3) Names of women in ii add r ^crr aSatcr? (Comment se porte M. votre pfere?) How is ymr father? 3(^ tegegnete ekn 35rer grautein ©c^wejier. Your husband=^^X ^tXX ©ema^t. FoMr M«/is=3J)re grau ®ema|)ltn. [Exercise 21.] ' They will even, if ignorant of one's name or title, say : ^«t Sto^Bar, ^eiT 2!litreifenbcc, Mr. Fellow-traveller. For this reason, no doubt, mein $eci-, sir, is of very limited use, and rather a sign of familiarity than respect. On the whole, though, this use of titles often deprives a conversation of stiffness. §60.] Gender of Nouns. 57 Chapter VII. Gender of Nouns. 60. Leading the wild free life which the ancestors of the present Germans did, and in constant intercourse with nature, it can easily be imagined that they personified the objects around them, and looked upon them, as it were, as com- panions. Just as, perhaps, our labourers might say of a tree : "Ee must come down," or our sailors of a ship: "She heaves to;" so, in former times, in reference to many objects, however small or insignificant, a word might be used showing the sex. This holds good principally in the case of concrete nouns. As for abstract, in many cases a quality found in a pre-eminent degree in a man would take the masculine gender, as : bet 9)Jut^, cowage ; bix ©totj, pride ; while a softer or gentler attribute, such as a woman might possess, would be feminine, as: bte (Situlh, patience ; bte ©C^pnpett, beauty ; btc 2lnmut|>, grace (cf. Latin patientia, caritas). Later on, when this feeling or instinct passed away, if a new word came into the language, it adapted itself by analogy with other words, or from some other unexplained or inexplicable cause, to a noun already existing in it, just as a new word taken now.-a-days from a foreign language does, e.g. t)te ©cene, fem., by § 62, 2. If we knew or could know the order in which words were adopted into the language, it would be possible to exemplify this theory more fully. From the above it will be seen that it is impossible to account for or guess with any accuracy at the gender of many German nouns, but so many are reducible to fixed rules, that the following hints will be found serviceable. 58 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. Vn. A. Masculine. 61. (i) Names of male persons and animals, where two forms exist : ber ^ontg, Ung; ber ©o^n, son; ber gud^S, fox; ber 86tt)e, lion.^ Except: btC ©^itbWai^C, sentinel (really an abstractj componnd of 2Sa(^c, fem. by § 62, 2) ; tie 3Kcmmc, cmoard ; bte ^erfon (Lat. persoTW,), person ; tie SSotfe, orphan.'^ Also all diminutives in =^en and Ann, which are neuter : baS SWantK^en, mannikin ; baS Snabtctn, Utile hoy. (2) Dissyllables in sett : ber 33obcn, ground; ber ©arten, garden; ber 3iegen, rain. Except: Infinitives used as nouns : bOS SReitcrt, riding, etc. (see NEnTEK : § 63, 4.) Also, baS Scdcn, basin ; bag giitten, /oaZ ; baS Siffen, csmAkwi ; baS Sofen, ^joU ,- boS Se^f"-./^/; boS SBoppen, coat-of-arms ; bag 3eif^cn, siflm. (3) Monosyllables, being abstract nouns, derived from the roots of verbs and not formed by adding a st : ber ^Vin\), find (from ftnben) ; ber 33ruc^, fragment (from bredpen) ; ber gaH, fall (from fatten) ; ber @i|, seat (from ft|en) (but bte ©c^ta^t, 6a«Ze (from fc^Iagen) ; bte Sffiut^t, weijA/, from rotegen). Except : bte SSa^I, cAoJce ; bit 3fl^l» number ; bte Quat, torment ; bte SSSeJr, de/ejice ; =tc^t (bte SRiilifc^r, re<«m ; bte Sotfe^r, pre- caution) and s=bot (bag ®ebot, commandment; bag 9$etbot, prohibition): bie ff Ut^t, /eor. ^ Feminine : 9u^|i«. Sotvin, but bie Wmi, bag @i^af, etc. ^ 'Sm SBaife is found in good authors, but Sanders says the feminine is more common. § 62.] Gender of Nouns. 59 (4) The larger divisions of time, and points of the com- pass: Seasons : ber gru^ttng, ©ommer, ^tti^ 2Sinter, Months ; ber 3anuar bev '^ai bev ®e^5tem6ev geBntar 3uni Dfto6et SDJcirs 3u{t 9io»ember Slprtl SJuguji Sejemfieic Days : ber ©ottntag ber Sten^tag ber Donner^tag 3)?ontag 3)Jttttt)0d^ %xiita^ ber ©onnabenb (®am(iag), Saturday ' Points of the Compass : ber 9iorb ber Dji ©lib 2Beft Except : bag %XnUa^X, spring, a compound of ba« ^O^X. (5) Names of rivers, especially wiiere the derivation gives little or no obvious clue to their gender, as : ber 9leto, £ibfr, Main, ©ongcS, Sl^one, Suero, Ortnofo, Stent, etc. .Erccpi the following, which are feminine: bie SonaU, ffil6c, ^aai, SWofet, 5Re»a, Ober, ©aar, ©etne, St>eif, S^emfc, 2Bctt5)feI (Vistula), SSBefer, Sotga. (6) Derivatives in .ig, =ing, 'tc^ : ber taftg, cage; bev Sepistc^, caj^jei; ber ©chitting, shillmg. (7) Nouns in »ee ; ber S^ec, tea ber ©ct)nee, snoui ber Sice, clover ber Sflffce, co/ee ber ©ee, lake B. Feminine. 62. (i) The names of females : bte grau, wife, woman; bie 'iRid^te, niece; bie a)?agb, waW Mccqit: Diminutives : bCtS 3»ab^en (dim. of 3»agb), girl. ba« grautetn (dim. of grau), j/omms' lady. bag Seib, womaw (familiar and depreciatory), bog grauetijitnmer, «^e "female." 60 The Parts of Speech. - [Chap. VH. (2) Dissyllables in *e denoting inanimate objects : bie ©onne, sun; bte SEpre, door; btc ^d^t, journey. Except: ba^ 5Jugc, eye; baS ©nbe, end; baS tt ^obatt, cobalt; bie f lattna. ' Rarely neuter. 62 The Parts of Speech. [CJliap. VII (3) Collectives with the prefix ®e* : baS (Scbtrge, wmmtain-range ; t>a6 ©efd^dft, business; bag ©erouf^, noise; boS @ef(^n)a|, gossip. Except: (Masculine) ber ©elianfe, thougU; bet ©ebrau^, use; bet @cfl$ma(f, ta«*e; bet ®eru(^, sm«K; bet ®enuf, enjoyment : bct ®tfanQ, singijig ; bet ©eWinn, flrain. (Feminine) bte ©efl^il^te, history; bit (Sefo^t, danger; bie ©eiuit, 6irtA; bte @ett)alt, force; bte ®e|loIt, /orm, figure; bie ®ebulb, pcUience; bie ©ebetbe, gesture; bte ®eBuJt, diie; bie ©eineiiibe, commuTjity, (4) Letters of the alphabet and, in general, all other parts of speech or expressions used as nouns, the most common of these being the present infinitive : bag ©epen, wdUng; bag ?e5en, living, life; bag "21," the "A;" bag "2Boi-um," the "why;" bag "^6)\" the " ah 1" bag Stau, the blue. baS getfHofe Sinetlei beS ©ienjJeg (Fe.), the dvll monotony of service (Stnettei, a numeral =o/" one land). Sin fi^wctmiitJigeS, gepreftc^ "®uten Sog" (G.), a melancholi/ forced "good day." Siefeg gt5?lt(^e " fRe^t getn " (G.), n, wo^es bet ©(^ifb, shield ... bag @(^ilb, s»^ bet ©ee, Me bte ®ee, sea bie ©teuer, tax bag ©teuer, rudder [Continued on next page ' Sometimes spelt >inn : Jtonisinn. §68.] Gender of Nouns, 65 MASCaLINE. Feminine. Neutee. bev Si:|ior,/ooZ bev SBerbtenji, earn- ings bag 3Sevbtenji, merit bie SBe{)V,2 defence bag SBepv, wear {in a river) [Exercises 22, 23, and 24.] bcr Sitctct, fc(TOp bcr f)aft, cZasp tier §)arj, -ffarz moun- tains bcr f)ut, ^* ber Saper, privateer ber liefer, yono bcr SoUcr, staggers bcr Scgat, Zesrafe ber SJJongcI, wan<, Joci bcr 5Kafl, mrasi ber O^m (for OJeim), uncle ber ^arf, package ber SReig, Hce ber ©C^Wutj}, bombast ber ©profTc, descendant ber ©tift, ijesr bcr S^etl, part ber 33ortt)flnb, pretext bic Sllrfel, stud on harness bie grieniltntg, recog- nition bie @ift,'* fl'i/i! bic f)aft, arresf bte |)ltt, guard,* right of pasture bie Sa^jcr, caper bie Siefer, pine bie SKanbct, almond, bie aMongel, mangle bic !Wai},/o«c7w'n3 bic SOTcirf, boundary, coin ( = Is. ) bic O&m, a Zigwd bie ©C&WUtjl, swelling bie ©proffe, rung of a ladder bic SSoriucinb. front partition-wall Exercises 7*2 and 73.] ba^ Srfcnntnig, i^crrfjci baS ®tft, poison bflS §arj, re.«M ba^ jlotfer, ycj-ijre ba^ Segat, legacy 'Oai 50?anbcl, number of 15 iai Tlaxt, marrow 'DO.i |5ad, rabble, "ca- naille " iai 9?eiS, twig, fagot boS ©tift, foundation, institution ba^ Sljeit, share (but in this sense often foundasamasculine) ^ Large gate of a town, castle, etc. ; a (small) garden gate is S^iiic, /: => As in the expressions : fi* jut 2Bc^i- |lc(Icii, to go on one's guard ; He Snnbujc^t', militia; tic gcueriue'^r, ^Jre brigade. ' Rare, except in the compound He ffliitaift, dowry ; the usual word is ka« ®cf^eii(. * ""f *"t ■&"' f''"/ '" ^e on one's gua^d. The Parts of Speech. [Chap. VIIL Chapter VIII. The Adjective. 69. There are three ways of declining an adjective in German. A. When preceded by the definite article or a word declined like it, i.e. btefev, jieiiev, etc. B. When preceded by the indefinite article, or a word de- clined like it, i.e. fetn, inetn, \^x, etc. 0. When used alone, i.e. not preceded by any declinable word. 70. The principle on which the German adjective is de- clined is as follows : — The terminations of the definite article must be found, somewhere, either in the other attributive word or in the adjective itself. These terminations are :^ Plural. ''X ft Singular. M. F. N. N. n =e '€ G. 'i =r =g D. 'AW 'X 5111 A. 'Xl =e 'i §71.] The Adjective. 71. A. After the Definite Article, and biefer, btefe, btefeS, this iener, jienc, jene^, that jebev, iebe, jebeS, every toe\i)tx, welc^e, Welches, which fold^er, fotc|)e, foI^eS, smcA manner, mand)e, manci^e^, many a bevfetbe, etc. (§ 133), the same berjentge, etc. (§ 132), that the adjective takes the termination stt in all the oblique cases and *e in the others. The oblique cases are all cases except the nominative singular of all genders, and cases like it (accusative, feminine and neuter). Hence it terminates as follows : — Singular. PZaro?. M. F. N. N. se sc =c Ke)n G. *(e)it Ke)n Ke)n .(e)n D. *(e)n tt)ai^, weak grof, great f4)»er, lieavy [Exercise 26.] O. The Adjective alone. 73. The adjective itself adopts all the terminations of the definite article. Note that the genitive singular, masculine and neuter, prefers the ending =e« ; the case-sign =§ being found in the noun. I Masculine. '. strong tea,. N. fiarfet SE|>ee G-. jiovIen(»6) X^tti D. jiarleitt Z^tt A. jiavEen Z^tt Feminine. fresh milk. frifd^et mm fnfc^c mU) Plural. ripe apples. N. retfc apfet G. reifertpfel D. reifctt Si^jfeln A. veifctpfef Neutek. cold water. falteS SBaffer Mim{'i) 2Ba(yerg fattem aSaffev faWeS SBajfev 70 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. Vin. Decline in one number only : — Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Plural. weak wine hard stone Sein wine ©tetJl, stom ^Ort, hard bad butter beautiful music Sutter, hutter 5KuP, music fl^Ie^t, had f(^6n, beautiful green grass pure gold ®taS, grass Oolb, gold grun, green rein, pure faded leaves young people SBlott, leaf Seute(pL),peqpfe Willfaded [Exercise 27.] 74. The adjective, when following a noun, is under no circum- stances declined. SaS SBofTcr ifl ttef. Tim water is deep. Sfi^llein, so^m tcie bie SKutter— (Voss). OMchens as tame as the mother. 3?un 5aBe xi) bie Slrme fret (G.). Now I have my arms free. ©a^ nie beitcgte f)eer, but bog |)ecr, biS^er nie bejtegt. The army hitherto unconquered. The noiin may, however, be understood : Ets t$ ^obt ben f (einen Seller unb bu ^afi ben grogen. 75. Two or more adjectives before a noun are declined in the same manner : — N. etn guter, retfer 2lpfel N. tiaxt§, ttefe^ SSaffer G. eincg guten, retfen a^jfel^ G. tfaren, tiefeit OBafevg D. etnem guten, vetfen Slpfel D. ffarem, tiefem aCapr A. einen guten, retfen Jlpfel A. Hareg, ttefeg ®afer 76. Present and past participles are used as adjectives and declined as such. the setting sun. a burst child. N. bte unterge^enbe Sonne etn gekannteS fitnb G. bev untevge^enben Sonne eine^ gefcrannten RiaUi etc. etc. gefoc^ter ©(^infen, boiled ham. ^ 77, 78, 79.] The Adjective. 71 Decline, in one number only : — Masculine. Feminine. Nbutbb. Plural. their long letter a quiet night deep water such poor men a vefy short let- every green mea- our own house no tiring jour- ter dow new English neys this equally the small, quiet bread very steepmouc- brave and church tains tempted gen- tleman. - letter, Srief night, Sfcicjt water, SBaffeic journey, Sfteifc, f. gentleman, f)ett meadow, SSSicfe bread, SSrOb mountain, S3erg, equally, gteic^ clmrch, ^ix^t deep, ttef m. (adv.) quiet, xa1)iQ ovm, cigen poor, arm hrave, rtiutjig English, cngttfcf) tiring, etmiitienb tempted, Serfuilt steep, jJeit Notes on the Adjectives. 77. Adjectives ending in =cl and ses may, and in the case of =el generally do, omit the -.«. before the 4 or -.v when taking any termina- tion but =cn ; as : ebet, nohle ; ebic (not ebcic), cbler, cbleS, cblcm tapfet, hrave ; tapfrc (or tapfetc), tapftcr, tapfrcsJ. When taking »en they drop the =e after the 4 or =r ; as : ebetn, tapfern. 78. Those in »en, if contracted at all, can, of course, only drop the , first c, as offcn, open, offncr, offtten, etc. 79.- ?)0C&, high, when inflected, drops the c, as po^e, ^6^tX, ^Ojeil, etc. In poetry and in a few idiomatic expressions the --t€ of the nomina- tive and accusative neuter is sometimes dropped. (Sin ebel Solf (Sch. ). A noUe people (for ebteg). ®ur4) gut ©tfid (&•)• By good luck (for gute«). Sin gut S^eit. .4 good deal. 72 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. VIII 80. Adjectives can be used for nouns, when they are written with a capital letter, and declined according to A, B, or C, as : — the rich man. the rich woman a rich man. N. bet SRct^c bie Sieie^e cin 3Jei0er G. bcS gjei^en ber 3Jct(|cn etneS SJeicJcn D. t)em3?ct4icn bet SRci^en einem 3lcic?)cn A. ben 3tet(?)cn bie sReii^e eincn SRet^cn the rich. rich people. N. bieSRcii^en me^e G. berSfiei^en 3lei*er D. benSiet^eii [ SleicSien A. bie ^eidim SRei^e So also : ber grcmbc, the stranger ; bic grembc, cin grcmbcr, bie Srem= ben, Srcmbe. ber SJeifenbC, the traveller, etc. ; ber ©CUtfc^C, the Oerman, etc. 81. The neuter of adjectives is often used indefinitely as a sub- stantive and declined like an adjective. the beautiful. N. bag ©c^otte G. beg ®c?)Bneii D. bcm S^oneii A. bag ©Celine bag Sejie, the best bflg greie, the open air bag SSeif e, i/te m^iie golgenbeg, tlie following 35erfd;iebeilCg, different things 3}eucg, news etJ»ag 3Jeueg, soma news ni(^tg SJeucg no news bOll etttog SJeuem, of something new CtWOg^ Seffereg, something better ettuag Slnbereg, something else Often contracted colloquially and in poetry into 'njaS. 3u 'was SBcjTcvem finti toir gctortii. — (ScH.) ]Ve are born for something better. §82.] The Adjective. 73 ®itU t0 ttivai 3Jeue« ? is there any news > * 2Bog gtebt a 'Simti •( What is the news ? ®UtCg tjun. To do good. ©a« ©c^ttjiertGUc gclong in jenet 3ctt (R.). ne Ao»-(Ze«< itoaa suc- ceeded at that time. Note 1.— Only in a few special instances is the adjective in its simple form used as a noun and declined as such— To denote a language : Scutfdj), German; grnnjonfd;, French. 6r frric^t gut Seutfd!), he apealcs German well; auf ®eutf(^ (or im Seutf^eji), in German, (ins Seutfc^c utcrfefecii, e, ^es usually goes according to A, gi)(genbe8 \i^mt (Sebie^t (H.). lite following beautiful poem. ^ Use the article : bcincc bc8 gutcit ©oljncS. 74 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. VIIL 83 (a). The pronoun one after an adjective is not translated in German. S(^ ^abi cm ^iUtS Simmer liebcr aU ein bunffes. / UJce a light room better than a darh one. Sil tin atfer Sinbrutf ctii Bcrlorncr ? (L.) la an old impression a lost one ? 83 (6). Formatim, of the Adjective. We append a short statement of the commonest adjectival suffixes with their respective meanings : (1) =6or> connected with the English "to bear," denotes (a) with nouns, to hear or produce, as : IBunberbCIt, productive of astonishment, wondetrful ; flU^ltBar, bearing fruit, fruitful; banfbar, thankful; fojibar, costly. (6) With verbal roots it = our ahle, as: cjtar, eatable ; benffcar, coneeivahU. (2) sen or sit (after cr) forms adjectives from names of materials, as: golbetl, golden; tDOttCtl, woollen; tebevn, leaiher. Pro- bably from false analogy with words like the last some are formed by suffixing setn, as : glafertl, glassy ; Jotjetlt, (3) =5 aft (connected with l^aftcil, to fix, or perhaps {)aben, to Imve, — Klugb) denotes having, or furnished with, as : f^merj^aft, painful; 'OanitfjoSt, enduring ; fejler^oft, /aa%. (4) sii^t (connected in meaning with A\6), see this)ioTcas adjectives from names of materials, not like »cn or =tg, to denote com- posed of, but to imply similarity with, ©tcitltg is "composed of stone"; ftcitltdjtis "like stone"; pigitit, woodeny ; crbit^t, earthy. (5) =tg, in adjectives formed from nouns or verbs, signifies having ov possessing, as: ma^tt'g (from SWo^t), having power, power- ful ; ergiebig (from ergeben, to produce), productive ; foniiig, sunny ; 'OiX'i'i.i^iiQ I suspicious. It forms adjectives from adverbs and prepositions, as: ^fUtfg (from 5eute), to-day's; ^iejtg (from \)\tx), of this place; fibrig (from fiber), remaining. 8 ^3.J The Adjective. 75 (6) =ifcS is a very common adjective-termination, the general signification of which is "in the manner of," or " belonging to" (English -y), as: t^tevtfl^, beastly, bestial; ttt)tf$, earthy; motertfl^, picturesque. It may be compared with A[6), from which, however, it is distinguished by often having a depre- ciatory signification, implying something faulty,— ftnblt(i^= childlike; Untii^^ = childish ; ^Mi^i) , quarreUoToe. It forms adjectives from the names of places (not towns, see § 82), as : ctiflttf^, ttalteniW. (7)-=Ii($ (connected with English like, German ^Azii), English equivalent -ly) implies similarity to, "after the manner of," and is the commonest adjective-termination. Only in a few cases does it form adverbs, as is so common with the English ■ly. (Cf. the adjective lovely and the adverb happily.) The vowel of the root-syllable is almost always modified. 3Wontl« tic^, manly; Jcrjtt^ hearty; WOXiUi), verbal; fc^recEttct;, terrible. 'With active verbs it = our -able, and may be compared with »bar, as : tlii^Iii^, able to be used, useful; IVa^Ui), to be lamented, lamentable ; tefctltc^, readable. Note 1. — There are a few adjectives in Si) formed from pre- sent participles, the final b being hardened into t, as : ftcfjeiit. US) (properly fle^enbJie^), imploring ; itefentliclj), essential. Note 2. — sliiij has sometimes diminutive force, as in flvmltdSi, rather poor ; xot^ie^, reddish. (8) -m'df{is, from 3)fop, measure, signifies "in a measure or de- gree." It is not of very frequent occurrence : KQilma^lQ, regular; Viex^aUmfma^ig, proportionate; JWcdmof ig, sjji/afe/e, adequate. (9) sf om (English -some, as in lonesome), connected with our word same, implies sameness or agreement, hence "of a kind," as: orbettfom, laborious ,• lieilfom, wholesome; loilflfam, stow. 76 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. VUL We append some adjectives for the meanings to be worked out in accordance with the above explanations : fur^rtar, miijfom {Wlu^e=toil), tufttg, ISnbttd^, Jertifii^, gKif« iax (greifen, to seize), Joftt^ (§of=coMrf), fet(t$t, frtitg, gclblic^ {QiV)= yellow), ctfeni (Sifen=iroji), fure^tfara, borttg (bort= there), tragBar, tuetbtf^, niittclmoftg, tafterjaft (Softer =t>»ce), ^immlif^, fciben (©ctbe=sj'tt), jlcigig. [Exercise 74.] Comparison of the Adjective. 84. German Adjectives are compared by sufiBxing St or scr to form the comparative ; sfi or =cfi to form the superlative ; and, if monosyllables, by modifying the root-vowel. Positive. Comparative. Superlative.. flet'n, small Heinev (fletnfl) ber, bt'e, baS fteiiifie trage, idle trager (tragP) ber, bte, bag tvagfte oriii, pooo- (irmer (arntp) ber, bte, baS avuijie fvomm, pious frpmmec (frommft) ber, bie, bag frommfie liebeiiswiivbtg, ttekn^ttjuvbiget bev (etc.) Iteknswurbtgjie amiable 85. There are two forms of the superlative : — ber, bie, bag, Hetnjle, and am fletnjien. The former should be used when several objects are com- pared together : Unter alten SBaiimen tji btefeg bev ffeinfle (not am ftein* flen). Among all the trees this is the smallest. §§ 86, 87.] The Adjective. 77 The latter, to express that a thing is at its highest degree under certain conditions. It corresponds with our superlative without the article. Split iji bag @tg am fiarl(ien. Here the ice is strongest (lit. at its strongest). 86. An c is inserted before the 'ft of the superlative after an i sound (6, f , % fc^)), and may also be put in for con- venience in pronunciation after a ft* no§, wet ber naffcjle alt, old ber attcfie (or ciltfle) brcift, bold ber bretftejle. 87. The following do not modify the root- vowel : — (o) Polysyllables : longfam, slow, tangfomer, ber tangfaraHe. mutjig, courageous, mut^tgev, btx mut^igjic. (6) Adjectives with the diphthong aW, Ian, lukewarm, laucr, bet touflc. faut, idle, faulcr, bet faulfie. (c) These monosyllables : (Those with an asterisk (*) vary, but the unmodified form is more common). iaxiQ,* a/raid U<^, flat mdt, naked ^axtnumb hax^(^, sharps Uoiglad pIott,>« ^oli, proud html bright^ ^0% hollow pUmp, clumsy firaff, «»?«" Ua%*pale ijOli, gentle^ xa\(^, quick^ ' fiumm, *«m6 btog!*6are taU, bald xoh raw flnmph blunt ixM, brave taXQ,* shabby^ xmh, round toU, mad imt, coloured fnapp, %Ai!' fa^tso/is wa,/uU bumpf,d«H' tiax* clear fanft, so/ii» mn,true fa^,dull* lo^m, ?ame ^(^ia^, slack mnb, sore falb (rare), (J«i« matt,dulV ft^Iont «Km ja^tlt, iaroe Mil}, false mOX^(^, rotten ^(^xog precipitous ^axt,* delicate^^ 1 to the taste, also in manner. = of a sword, Pl^J«. ff '' P°Jf ,'jf/'' Sot sound. * of colour. 6 poetical, " JofteS^int Jen, etc. 6 i.e. stingy ; a shabby person, present, etc. ' tight-fittmg, a so =^l^+^ «n measure) ? never msA, which is wiiefonncn, sorcilig. fl^l^^eC"^- - or ,e»«« (in manner etc.). " opposite of fi^faff (of a rope, etc.). ^^ not of health, which is fvSnflic^. 78 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. Vin. 88. ^od^ takes ^p^er ^od^ji ®rof „ grower gvo^t (not grogefi). 89. S02e^c is used when two qualities attaching to one objeot are compared together by means of adjectives : er ifi mcljt; tict-fii^toettSctifii^ aU ftetgcbig (R.). .He is more extravagant than liberal (i.e. has more extravagance than liberality). aim mcificn, most, in the case of adjectives in -\\i) to avoid harshness: flltt JtlCtflcn fr{cgcrtf(5, the most u-arlihe, and son-.c times with participles : am mcijicn gcnetgt, mo>!t inclined. 90. Than, after the comparative, is aU : jiinger rtl§ t(^. 91. The comparative of equality is fo...>Vte (or al6), as... as; or ebenfo wte (or aU), just as... as: 3c^ 6tn fo jlet^tg t»te mein 9'lo^6or. / am as diligent as my neighbour. 92. The comparative of inferiority is ntc^t fo...al^, or wentgev (nituber)...a{g; and the superlative, wentgji or am ttjeitigfien : 3li^t fo grD§ (tall) aii er, or weniger gro§ at^ er. 2)ie wentgii wtd^tigen (or bie am tDem'gften wi^ttgcn) Sret'gntffe, ev befle ber meij!e ber minbefte bcr erjle, first U^te, last ouf etiie, outmost, uttermost ^tnterjlC, hindmost inneijie, inmost mittetfie, midmost obetjie, uppermost untcriJe, undermxist titititx^t, foremost bet tX^tXi, former le^tere, latter duiere, outer ^itltcre, Under tnnete, iniier mittletC, nearer the middle obere, upper untere, under BOrbere, more in front 97. Adjectives in the comparative and superlative degrees are declined according to the rules for the declension of adjectives in the positive degree : N. ein retcfer^ec mam ber retc^ji^e ?Kann fatter^-eg 2Bafer G. einee rei(!^er*en beg retdj)ji=ert mmxit^ 3J?anne^ D. etnem reic^er^en bem tei4)|t*en 9)tanne ben retc^jt^en 3JJonn aSanne A. einen retdper^en 3Kann So also : the younger son cheaper wine wine, 2Bein, m. elieap, Jittig talter^en aBajfev^ fdlter^em SGBopr fdlter^es SBoffer a nobler woman more touching fidelity fidelity, Srcue,/. mciftZe, Ct>et, touching, rit^renb the most fertile valley my bitterest word valley, S^at, «. fertile, friK^tbat Utter, bitter [Exercises 28 aw(Z 75.] 80 The Parts of Speech. [Cliap. IX. 0, nult 1, cttt, etne, ein, or eing ^ 2, iwei. 3, brei 4, iDter 5, funf 6, fec&g 7, jteben 8, a^t 9, neun 10, se^n 11, elf 12, sworf 13, bretje^n 14, iDterje^n 15, funfje^n 16, fec^sepn 17, Itebje^ii 18, a(^t5e|)n 19, neunjefin 20, xwanjtg 21, ein «nb jwanstg. Chapter IX. The Numeral. The Cardinal Numbers. 22, jwet unb awattjtg 25, funf unb jwanjig, etc. 30, breigig 40, sier^tg 50, fiinfjtg 60, fec^itg 70, ftebjtg 80, a^t^tg 90, neunjtg 100, punbert 101, punbert (unb) et'nS los; :^unbert (unb) ac^t 114, fiunbert (unb) utcrxepn 150, :punbert (unb) funf jig 154, ^unbert loiev unb fiinfjig 200, jweipunbert 300, bveij)unbevt, etc. 1,000, taufenb . 10,000, ije^ntaufenb 100,000, ^unberttaufenb 1,000,000, eine WliUion 5,000,000, fitnf SWtlltonen eine 5BtHton = 1,000,000,000, not as in England a million million. 1885, «i|txe^n^unbevt fiinf unb ac^tjig. ^ Really the neuter of ein, contracted from eincS, used when no noun follows ; e.g. in counting, but not when preceding another number, as ein unH!ictjig,/ori^-o»e. The numeral ein may be distinguished from the article either by a capital: Snpt un8 Sin f/ctj ^iAcri, or by spaced type (e i n). §§99-102.] The Cardinal Numbers. 81 99. The Cardinals can be used as nouns, and are feminine : as : bu 5afl i>ie Siinf JU grof gef(|ttc6en, you have viritten the five too large; etne tOltlifc^e 3e9n, a Roman X., and take a plural : attc SSierC, all fours ; mit SSieren fasten, to drive four-in-hmd : ^unbctte Don 5Renfc^cn. hundreds of people. Note. — JBuntievt and Saufenk are neuter when used as nouns. SIKilfioit, Sinioit, etc. , are feminine, and take the usual feminine plural >cit. The noun following is considered to be in apposition : 3»ei SBIiltioncn (5in> ajo^net, 2,000,000 inhabitants. 100. The declension of the numeral etn is the same as that of the indefinite article. When, however, it is used loUhout a noun following it, it takes the terminations of the definite article, and is thus declined : — Masc. Fem. Nbut. N. einet eiiie tixxti (ein^) G. txnti cinev eine^ D. etnetn etner etnem A. etnen eine etneg (etiig) ®ttter »on btefen ^txxtvi. SBotten ©t'e etn St {egg) i^akn ? 3a, geben @te mtr ein§. 101. The only other cardinals that can be declined are jtDCi and btci. These have the genitives, JlBeicr and brcict, and the datives JttJelcn and brcten, which are rare. These can only be used when no declinable word precedes-: as, ber Sienet JWeier ^erren, the servant of two masters ; but the dative with b on is equally correct, and perhaps more common, btx ©tenet »on Jttjet ^iXXtn. 102. The Distinctive Numerals are : — cinerlei, of one kind jweiertci, of two kinds breicrlei, uierettct, etc. jweietfet Sui^, two kinds of cloth add to these : Btetcrlei, manc^erlei, of many kinds; atterlet, of all kinds; fcinert.et, of no kinds; betbertet, of both kinds. mon^etlei SBetn, matiy kinds of wine; bcibettei @e« f4)le(^t^, of both genders. F 82 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. IX. 103. The Keiteratives (How many times repeated ?) are : etniital, once jwetmaT, twice bretmal, Dtevmot atDanjtgmat, etc. ine^irinat^,^ several times oftltialg, oftentimes ejus fijr attemaf, once for all 104. The MultiplicaUves (How many fold ?) : — dn^ad), single, simple^ (Jttcifart;) boppelt, double brcifai^, Dierfa^, jc^nfac^, etc. or: einfattig,^ jrocifcilfig, je^nfdttig, etc., maiiiiigfoUig, manifold. Add to these citljig, single, only ; ein einjigcg SDZd, once only; f etn Cnjige^ SWot, not a single time ; mcin einjiger ©ojn, my only son. 105. The time of day :— efll U{)V (or eing), one o'clock jttjei (U{li:), two o'clock jwolf (UJt), ^wefee o'ctoci ^aI6 3 (U^r), half-past two ein aStertel nocfi »ier (Ubr) i , ^ j. ■ m- i r dr- r ,J( \ MiMrter post four etn aStertel auf * funf (U^r) J ^ ^ ■' etn aStertet t)ov a&t (Ubr) i , , . ,^ 20 SWinuten noc^ bvet (U^r) 25 3Jfinuten »or brei (Upr) ttjieutet U^r tft e^ ? wAa< o'cfoc^ is i< ? Uin tDteiPtel U^V ? at what o'clock ? [Exercise 29.] 1 The »6 is from analogy with the genitive of time (i.e. kc8 atenbS)- ^ E.g. ein ciiifn(!j)e8 ajfatjl, a simple meed. ^ Also silly : ein einffiltigcr aJJenfc^, a simpleton. * The auf is often omitted in conversation, eiti Sitctct CK^t, qitarter-post seven. 106,107.] The Ordinal Numbers. 83 B. The Ordinal Numbers. 106. "First" and "third" are irregular in formation; "second," and those from 4 to 19 inclusive, are formed by- adding »te to the cardinals; "twenty'' and those above by suffixing sjle. 1st, ber (bie, ba^) cvftc 4:0th, bev »terjfgpe 2d, bet jttiette 100ft, ber ^unbertfle 3d, ber bvitte lOlsi!, ber bunbert unb evjle ith, bev »ievte I02d, bev fiunbert unb jweite etc. 126ft, bev ^unbevt fe^)^ unb 20ft, bev jtBanjigfie jnjanjigfte 214 bev ein unb swanjigfle 200ft, bev jmei Ijiinbevtjle 22d, ber jwet unb swanjigjie 1000ft, bev taufenbfie 30ft, ber bvetf tgjte 25ev Wie'okUi (or JDietttel^e), lit.: the "how mucUhl" Ser tt)ie»telte woven @te im @ranien? What was yowr pla/x in the examination ? 107. Ordinals are declined like adjectives. N. bev evfie Sag N. niein awettev ©o^n G. be^ erjien SageS G. meine^ jwetten \tx unb eine aStertelfiiinbe. Half=))oXh, whole=o,a\\ix etn |)alber Xaa,, ein ganjer Stag, eine ^atbe ©tunbe. 3wet unb ein :^at6er %at f cine greunbe. He has not any friends. Sein ^tnb |)at geweint. iVo child has cried. ^eineS ^at geweint ^etnet »on btefeti tpfefn ift retf. Not one of these apples is ripe. 117. ®tct and 3Sentg are usually not declined in the singular : dt ^icle« SSSein, Tnany hinds of wine ; but this distinction is so fine that a German would prefer saying in the latter case : wte SBeinfoitcn or sietertei aBein. i Cf. Lessing : @onti. 3u Bid aricttcn muffen iann t^n urn ken Srtamcn jtun|lbt iringen. qSriitj. 3* meinc nic^t aSieleS fontictn tiiel, ein aBenigcS, aficc init Sfcip. CoSTl. Worlcing too much may cause him to forfeit ilie name of artist. Prince. / don't mAan many (different) things, hut much [work), few things, hut with diligence. 88 The Parts of Speech. [CHiap. IX. 118. fOle^t is not declined : mcjt SSrOb, more bread (or nO$ SSrob). PL mi^xexi, several (more correctly meljre). no more=hin . . . mejr, no more time=ttine 3Eit mc^r. T/iere is no more on the table. ®S til tetner («e, 'SS) ntc^r auf bcm 3;if(^e. T«)o »io}-c=jio$ jwet. 119. sweift, »nos«. Jlfos^, sing. =bflS SKcifle, or bct grofte S^eil : ft 6tetct baa Ttd^e, he ofiers most. Moat, or most of the, pi. =bte metjlen (adj. pron. btc OTcifien) : bie mei^ett ©ttmmen, most of the voices (or »ote«). Mostofmy=m.tmt metflcn : SRatmunb IV. »croitferte feine meiften Sc(t^t(;umer (K). Rayrrumd tlie Fourth sold most of his possessions. 120. A /eH;=etntge or ein ^jaar (with a capital ^, etn 55aar means a couple), ^inige Xao^t nac!&^er, or cht paat S;age nac^|)er, a /«w days after. Sin paar, a few, is in- declinable : ©ett cin |»aor taufenb ^a^ren (P. Heyse). For the last few 1000 years. ^Rac^ cin |)aai: S;a9en (Oppel). After a few days. Feu) is wentge, pi. 121. @inig is used in the singular only to express "a certain in- definite quantity of " : cinige 3cit na^Jer. Some time after. In the plural it is adjectival or pronominal : einige S^ievc teben in bet SDSiiflc, SoTne animals live in tJie desert. <£iuige JUOtttcn i0 lli(^t ctcillben. Some wotUd not believe it. §§122-127.] Indefinite Numerals. 89 122. Wlandttt, =c, 'e9=many a, in the singular. In the plural it is almost synonymous with 'oiel=many. It is adjectival or pronominal: SVlani^e S^iete. Many ot certain animala. As a pronovui it=mo!i!/ a one. 123. ^cibei, =e, =e8, both, adjectival and pronominal. It follows the article or possessive adjective : ®ie 6eiticn Sonige, both the kings; meine beiben SBtiiber, both my brothers; n)ir 6ciSe, we two, both of us ; bt'e beiitn, the two, both of them. 124. (Senug, enough, is better placed after the noun : ®etb genug, mjmey enough. 125. @tttia§, some (sing.), is often, especially in conversa- tion, contracted into 'ftiaS : etftia§ 33rob, some bread. 'tWftS ®ute€, somethmg good. 126. etncr tion bcii Seibcit (pron. Silier BOn ?S d'ien)= either j tinet bott Sen feeiben SBriib em, eiiAcr JroiAer. Seiner »on ben fteiben (pron. Seiner i>On ^,)=neither. or (eibec (=e, eS) niifyt. an bem ®angc« troupe id; ftcibes nt«*, unb broui^e bnS 2Berf» jeug Sciber niii^t ju fein (L.). Om iAe Ganges I need neitlter, and need be the tool of neither. 127 a. Some and any, before a noun, are often not trans- lated. Give me some wine. ®e6en nen am bejien? WTiat day suits you best ? But if what=what hind of a, use ttiaS fur ein, etc What pencil shall I bring ? aSJug fiic cincn SBleijiift fott i^ fevingen? aSa§ fiii; ein ©ef^aft ^at grau ©.? What kind of a business is Mrs. S.'s ? 94 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. X. Before names of materials, and in the plural, where of course no article can come in, use simply ft>tt§ flit. What kind of cloth 1 tt»a§ f fir %.\xi) ? What hm-ses ? toaS fflr ?5ferbe ? 137. These words have also exclamatory force : — aSSeli^ea ©emitter! orSKoS fut efn ©ewtttet! what a storm/ Like foll^er (see above, § 134), mli^ex preceding the article is not declined : SSeW eiii unerlBotteter Srofi! (G.) What an unexpected consolation ! or even, in exclamations, before an adjective : Wlit tticii^ iibcrjeugcnbcr Sauf^iung! (Sch.) With wliat convincing deception I D, Possessive. 138. mettt, meme, mein, my betn, betne, bein, thy fetn, fetne, fein, his, its t^r, t{>re, i^r, her, its Declined like eiit, etne, etn. unfer, unfere, unfer, our (euer, euere, euer), j/owr 3pr, 3^re, 3pr, ^/ow t^r, ijtre, t^r, aS bric^t t^w ben |)at8 (for fctncn $.). (G-) That breaks his neck. SWie ffopft bfl« $etj (Voss). My heart beats. Sie %l)xamn jiejjcn tSm in ben 2lugen (G.). The tears are (standing) in his eyes. Sin ©c^ug 5at S*«en ben rei^ten %xm cin i»cnig gclojmt (L.). A shot has maimed your right arm a little. Ser arme 31. pftff ft^ bie Sippen troden (Riehl). Poor if. whistled his Ups dry. Note. — ^In addressing persons of rank by the titles SBJaicjiat (grcel. lenj), 3)ur(!!)Cau(^t (Serene Highness, etc.), Sua- is contracted into gtu. em. ajjqeilat (read: Sine m.), ©ein, Seiner, into ®e., @r. @r. SweKenj (read: ©einet (Si:.). Sl^ro, i^vo, yoar-, 7ier, their is now of rare occurrence. 143. With reference to inanimate objects it is preferable to use the genitive of the demonstrative bet (beffen, bcren, beffcn, pi. bcren) or of berfelbe (see above), instead of fcin, X^X, keeping these for per- sons, e.g. of bag f)ou^ : beffen So(^, its roof; of bie Sit^e : beren t^vxi, its door (or ba^ Sat^ beJTelbcn, bie S^ure berfelben). Note. — Also to avoid ambiguity, referring to the last mentioned : 3(5 tenne ■gettn 33. feinen ©o^it uni beffen grou (feine Stau might mean Mr, B. '« wife). 144. Remember to repeat the possessive (article, etc.) before nouns of diflferent gender : my father and mother, mein 35ater unb nieitie Gutter. [Exercises 32 and 77.] § 145.] The Pronouns — Personal. 97 Chapter XL The Pronouns. 145. A. Personal. Singular. 1st. 2d. 3d Masc. N. t(^, / N. bu, thou N. er, he G. metn(er), of me G. betn(eic), of thee G. fetn(er), of him D. mtr, to me D. btv, to thee D. i^in, fo him A. xsAi), me, A. btc^, thee A. t6lt/ Aim 3d Fern. 3d Neut. N. fte, she N. eg, *« G. tjtrer, of her G. (fetner), 0/ ji! D. i^v, to her D. (t>m), to it A. fte, her A. ei,it Plural. 1st. 2d. 3d. N. Wiv, we N. (i{ii:)i @ie, you N. fte, they G. unfer, of us G. (euer) S^^ver, 0/ you G. t^ver, of them D, un0, to us D. (euc^) 3^nen, !!o D. t{»ncn, ^ them A. mi, US A. {iii(^) See below (§ 153). ( 3 98 The Parts of Speech. [Cliap. XI. 146. The genitives mfin, beilt, fcin, etc., are now only used with the few verbs and adjectives which take a genitive : 3$ f^ame mic^ fciner, lam ashamed of him; S^rcr cingcbenf, mindful of them (or you) ; SBetgt^' mcin rdiji, forget me not; or with a numeral, which they precede : Unf ec JWOlf, twelve of us. ®g jtnb i^rer njenige, tliere are few of them. But notice WXX olte, all of us ; ©te beibc, loth of you. 147. The genitive and dative of eS, on account of their identity with the masculine, are used only of persons (e.g. of bo8 jtinb, etc.). Use for inanimate objects the genitive bcff en or beffeliien, and for the dative bcmfelben. In general it is preferable, when speaking of inanimate objects, to use the genitive and dative of btrfelbe for all genders and numbers : 3$ gab bemfetben ctnen ©top. 1 gave it (e.g. the gate) apitsh. 3^ fotgte benfclben. I followed them (e.g. the trades). 3(^ folgtc tbnen. I followed them (e.g. the people). 3^ ge^orc^e i^r. I obey her. 3(5 ge^orije Setfeiscn. / obey it (e.g. ber ©timme beg ©cwtfTenS, the voice of conscience). Sartja muf tc »ot bem Slufbtui^ Scffcttcn (i.e. bcS $ccrc^, of the army) no^i SJabptoti juriid (Ebebs). B. had to go back to B. before the disbanding of it {before it dis- banded). 148.' With a preposition the following compound forms are used, but only with reference to inanimate objects. 1 SJergcffcn, to forget, except in this expression, now always takes an accusative. § 149.] The Pronouns — Personal. 99 Compare the English thereon, therewith, etc., and notice the euphonic sr before a vowel : — baran, at it, thereat baneben, beside it bartn, in it, therein baviiteV/ over it, thereover baruntev, wnder it, among it bavum, about it, therefore baDOn, of it, from it, thereof, etc. batJOr, before it bowiber, against it baju, to it, thereto ba5tt)tf(t;en, between it baraitf, on it, thereon barau^, mt of it, thereout babei, by it, thereby baburti^, through it, therehi/ ba^ixX/forit bagegen, against it ba^tnter, behind it bamtt, luith it, therewith banad^ (bornarf)), after it, thereafter 3^ fpre^e »on \\)m, I speak of him ,- tc|» fpred;c batton, —of it. @c fianb bancBen, he stood near it (e.g. the table, not neben t^m). Note. — With other prepositions than those given above these forms are not in use. iDaro^iic, taranjiatt, do not exist. Use bevfette. 149. The genitives of the personal pronouns are combined with the prepositional forms =luegen, «tt)it(en, and »^at6cn as follows : — metnctocflcn on my account ' betnctnjegcn feinetmegcn unfertocgen (euettttjegen) S^tetwegcn urn meinettt)iffen for my sake urn bcinetwtdcn urn feinetreillen urn i^xttwiUin urn unfertiBiffcn (urn eucrtwitten) urn S^rctwittcn (meinctf;aI6en) on my behalf (beitictjatfccn) (feinetjalbcn) (i^ret^albcn) (unfert^atfien) (eucrtjatben) (3I;ret^oI6en) 1 aReinctwegen, feinetocgen, etc. also mean for aught 1 care (he ca/rea, etc.): aneinetwegen (onnen ©ie eitien g(in;cn Sentiur ne^men. For aught I care you may take a whole hvmdredweigkt. 100 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XI. 150. The personal pronouns must of course agree in gender with the nouns to which they refer : SBo tft betn .^ut? ©r (not es) ifi auf bem Stfc^. 3^ lann i^n (not e©) nii^t ftnben. 151. In the case in which gender does not correspond to sex (bnS 3BeiB, tlie wife ; bie ®cji{bn)a4ie, the sentinel; diminutives, etc.), especi- ally when the pronoun is far separated from the noun it refers to, it is allowable and, indeed, usual to adapt the pronoun to the sex and not the gender : S!a8 3immermabi5en fonttte gcrobe je^t untcn nt^t wcgfommcn, f«e ^atte aUe f)anbc »ott ju t^un. (P. Heyse.) The parlour-maid could not get away just then, sJie had her hands full. (Grammatically correct : c8 ^atte). 3m Iangcn.3uge jogen bte SBcibcr (neuter) aai, icbe abcr trug mif bem SRiitfen iSte« 2Bonn. (Gbimm.) In a long procession the women marched oui, but ea^h bearing her htisband on her back. (For jebeS and feinen. ) 152. t^ bin e^, UisI iin td^ eS ? is it 19 bit tip e^, it is thou wax er e& ? was it he? er iji ii, it is he waxen wix e^ gewefen ? had it Wix jtnb iS been we f id) war eS tdj) 6tn e^ nic^t id^ bin tt gewefen bin id^ e^ ni^t gewefen ? etc. 153. The Fronoun of Address. In addressing relations, intimate friends, small children, and animals, use the 2d person singular bu, pi. i^C (corresponding possessives, bein and euet). In aU other instances, whether addressing superiors, equals, or inferiors, use ©ie for singular and plural (corresponding ! 151] The Pronouns— Personal. 101 possessive, 3^v), spelt with a capital even in the middle of a sentence. tavl, warum ntmmji bu beincn |)ut ntcl;t ob ? Charles, why do you not take your hat off 2 ^inber, x^x mugt jei^t nac^ S)m\t fommen. Children, you must come home now. ©uteu SWorgen, ^err 33ertf)otb, e« freitt tntcf;, Sic 511 fe:^en. SBte ge{)t eg Sl)tcc grau ©ema^tin ? ffooc? morning, Mr. B., lam glad to see you. How is Mrs. B. f ^ellnev {waiter), bvtngen (©ic mir eiu,®Iai3 SSBapv. -ZPoie.— Before the last century, and locally at the present day, bu and i^c were the usual pronouns of addi-ess to strangers ; then followed 6r and ®ie (3d fern.), and finally the ®ie (3d pi.) of the present day.^ See any German play where the scene is laid in the last century, 6.17. Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. Now-a-days to address any one but a relation or an intimate friend with tiu or i^v would be an insult. 154. The personal pronouns are strengthened by the emphatic pronoun ^ttb^t following them : 3c^ fclftft i)aU eg get|)an, or i^^aii i€ fetftft get{)an, I have done it myself; Sit felb|i, 2Giv fel5p, etc. Note 1. — Another form of fet6|l is fctScv, synonymous in meaning, but it must follow the auxiliary : i^i M^' '^ fcltiM! gefe^en. Note 2. — ®etB|i before a noun or pronoun = ewejj ; ®elb(l \m mup ta(I;cn, even you must laugh ; fcltfl bet Jfotiig, ev&n the king. ^ From Koch's Deutsche Grammatih. He tells us that in the ninth century >u began to be supplanted by i^r. At the beginning of the seventeenth century 6r and ©ic (3d sing. fem. ) were in vogue. Towards the end of the same century the plural ©ie was introduced, which, ' ' in struggle with ®t and 3^r from 1730 to 1740, unfortunately prevailed with the new impulse given to prose." — (Sixth Edition, p. 227.) 102 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XI. 155. Subject postponed. It is much more usual than in English,' even in ordinary conversation, to postpone the subject (if not a pro- noun), and begin with eS, corresponding to our there : ©8 tarn ein 3?tttcr in ben ?)of. There came a Tcnight into the courtyard. ®§ reben unb trciumcn tie SWenfc^en »tet »on 6efTern fitnftigen Sagen. (Sch.) Men speak and dream much of better days to come. e§ glanjt ber BmX, e8 fc^tmmert ba^ ®tmai). (G.) Tlie hall shines, the chamber glistens. es flopft Semanb. SoTtie one is Icnocking. ©8 mattet 3etnanb auf ®ie. Some one is waiting for you. ©8 leBc ber Siintg ! Long live the Icing ! 156. This postponement of the subject accounts for what appears at first sight to be a "false concord." It occurs with the verb fetlt, to be. @§ waren ineine SBviibet. They were my brothers (not fte waren). @tnb C§ ^^Vt St'nber ? Are they yowr children ? Here Sriibev is the subject of waveit, ^t'nber of ftiib. 157. This rule also applies to interrogative and demonstra- tive pronouns, the neuter singular being used whatever the gender or number of the subject : S)C§ waren gtucEtic^e Slage. Those were happy days. aSelc^e^ tft ber Jilngfie @o|n ? Which is the youngest son ? S)te§ (or btefeg) finb meine 95ferbe. These are my horses. (Compare : That on the good ground are they^ — Luke viii. 15.) 1 Owing to our lack of case-endings we cannot invert in English in the case of a transitive verb. We can say : there fell a stone from the roof, but not well : there struck a stone the boy. The Germans can invert both : ti tvaf pin Stein ben Jtnalicn. 158160.] Pronouns— Reflexive & Reciprocal. 103 158. Similar to this is the postponement of a subjective sentence : e§ tjt befiimmt, ba? er fommen mirb. It is certain that he will come. i.e. baf»ct»{ommen=i»trb (subject) til beftimmt. 159. This e8 (like the French le : je le suis) takes the place of some word or words preceding, or even following (see last example) : ©ic warm ineine ©efellen unb pnb es. (G.) Th£y were my companions and are so. ©oMflbubicfetcbtefierjogfetbii? 3c$ feiit'^ (for eg). (Sch.) So you are this noble duke himself? I am. ®er ^ixpQ ill mit fetnen geinben atlcn oerfo^nt, er i|l c8 au$ mit btr. (Sch.) The duke is reconciled with all his enemies ; he is so, too, with you,. ®r iDogt eg, tiicf)t ju fommen. (G.) He does not venture to come. [Exercise 78.] B. Reflexive and Reciprocal. 160. There is only one Keflexive Pronoun in German— fii^. It is 3d person only of all genders, both numbers, dative and accusative case. The other persons are supplied from the personal pronouns ' Singular. ^^«™^- lat. 2d. 3d. 1st. 2d. 3d. D. mit btv )„, D-ung (euc1))ftcf) ).., A. mtcb birf) 1'^ A. uug (euct))fic{; J' 104 The Parts of Speech. [Chap, XI. Hence a reflexive verb is conjugated as follows : — ic^ freue midf, I rejoice tc^ fc^met4)Ie mix, I flatter myself t)U fveufi biif), thou rejoicest Du fc^met^etft bit, thou flattered thyself er, fie, ef freiitfid), Ae?-e/'o*c«s cr, {te, eg fc|)ineid)elt ^idf, he flatters himself wix freuen unS, we rejoice wix fc^meic^eln unS, we flatter (t^v fveut cui^), ) (ipr f(^met(^ert c««^), ) you flatter ©tc fveuen fid), I "^ -^ @ie f4)met4)etii fi^, f yourselves fi'c freuen fid), they rejoice fie fc^llieirfjelil fid/, //i«2/ ^Wer 161. The Eeciprocal Pronoun is dnattber, dative and accusative of all genders : fBiv toben einanbec. We praise one another. SBtr f^metc^eln einanbec. We flatter each other. @te fa^en neben einanber. r^gy sat side by side. SOBiv gtngen au€ einanbec, o{>ne einanbec »er|iaiibeit ju ^aben. (G.) /iPe separated without having understood each other. 162. The use of the reflexive as a reciprocal is common (French ils se louent), but not recommended by good gram- marians on account of the ambiguity : (&te traiieu ft4). They trust themselves. rinjeii, Sen ^at ber ^tinj umgcbrat^t. (L.) Literally : Him (that fellow) have not robbers, him have accomplices of the prince, him the prince has killed^ SBemi ntc^t ier, boc^ etner, ber (jier rcgtert. (Kleist.) If not he (the king), then some one who rules here. Note. — The demonstrative that after a preposition, when refer- ring to things, or in an adverbial sense, is often rendered by the com- pounds bdvan, tiorin, etc. : Upon that he left the hall; iatauf sevtic^ ev ten ©acit; and of a nearer object, on this, with this, corresponding forms with f}icv are found : JicvauS, out of this ; ^tertci, hereby ; l^tewon, Jierefrom. ^ievaui cvfi4t man, from this one sees. 1 This is the original form and declension from which the definite article is contracted. • 106 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XI. 165. ®icfet and jener are used respectively for the laMer and the former. Dfen (S5utio) unb ^e|i It'egen an ben entgegengefegten Ufern ber 3)onau, btcfcS am ttnfen, icneS am rec^ten Ufer. B. and P. are situated on opposite banks of the Danube, the latter on the left, the former on the right bank D. Determinative. 166. Serjentge, bteieiuge, ba^Jientge, that, iJie one, he, she, etc. (§ 132). Shortened form : ber bte ba^ Genitive: beffen bcveii beffen etc. etc. etc. (§ 163.) Plural : bte berev beven bte ■Derfelbe, btefelbe, ba^felte, the same (§ 133). 167. Serfelbe, etc., may be used for the 3d personal pronoun, especially in the epistolary style : — gteber ^atl, i(^ wotlte bag ^Jadct bur$ ntcincn greunb S. ubet- fenben; berfel6c iH obct ploltii^ crhanlt. Dear Charles, J toas going to forward the parcel by my friend B,, but he has been taken suddenly iU. It wiU be found useful to avoid the clashing of similar sounds, such as : gcbcn ©ie fie mir. Say: geben ©ie mix t!efclbc(n^). 3(^ ftjiirfte i^n S^neit. Say: tcb fi^idte SJntn benfetbeii." The pronoun berjeiltge, with its shorter form ber, is only used as the first member of the correlatives he wlio, etc (see § 176). ' Here also the singular (if (she, it) can be distinguished from the plural fie (they) ; the former being ticfelbe, the latter titfeUtn. 2 The ahoiter word first. See § 330. § 168.] The Pronouns— Relative. 107 E. Relative. 168. Singular. Plural. M. P. N. N. tt)etcf)et weii)t Wd^ti who, which N, tt)et(|er p fwet^eg tt)et(|)er nsetc^e^^ whose, of whom, „ (wetc^er^ '^'Heffen beren beffen of which '(-beren D. weld&em welc^er wetc^em to whom, or D. wet^en which' A. tvelc^en ivelc^e iveld^eg w^to, wfeA A. wetdfie Just as in English the demonstrative " that " is used for the relative, so in German bet, bie, brtS can take the place of Welcfiei", 'i, 'ti. It is declined as in § 163. Singular. Plural. K ber bte bag bie G. beffen beren beffen, etc. beren benen, etc. Ser Dmnitug/ tticld^er bte SRetfenben »om Sajn^of ixa^te. (P. Heyse.) The omnibus which brought the travellers from the station. 3^ :^aben einen fSatev, bet fein aSerinpgen yat aU biefe etnjt'ge Sloc^ter. (Sch.) I "have a father who has no fortune but this only daughter. Der . Suc^pnbler, bet bent (or tcel^em) bag SDSerf erfc^ien. The boohseller with whom the work apjpeared (who published the work). 1 The genitives MjcIi^cS, etc., are rare^ Urn tutlOjev wiKen id; gcfongen p^c (G. ), for whose sake I am a prisoner. 108 The Parts of Speech., [Cliap. XI 169. It is generally a matter of sound, but bet, bte, ba^, being the shorter, is preferred in conversation or in a less laboured style. There is, however, one instance in which ber, etc., only must be used : that is when the antecedent is a personal pronoun. Du, ben (not wel^en) atteg 58oK \kU. (G.) You, whom all the people love. Note. — Properly speaking, tuel^cv is the correlative of foleitiet, and means of stick a kind that. (Sin aHcnfc^ )uetc|ec feine SDlitmnifdjicit tctiiigt.- A man who (i.e. mch a inan as) deceives his fellow-men. But : 5)et 0ienf(^, ber m\(^ tctiojen ^at. Tliat m/in who has deceived me. But this distinction is not now generally observed : — ®tn aBcufd; bet feine gefutibeii ©lieber ^at. (P. Heyse.) A man who lias his sound limbs. 170. When the antecedent is a personal pronoun or the vocative case, this (personal) pronoun is usually (if in the nominative) repeated in the relative sentence (or, after the vocative, the second personal pronoun is inserted), 3(^, Scr id) fo Bid gematjit ^abt. I who have done so much. 3^r,bie ifii fiber m\6 fo bitter euc^ befcl;n)ert. (W.) Tou wlio complain so biUerly of us. ec^dmt eu(^, bcr Wtx ein 3flg«r f'tii WcUt. (Riehl.) For shame, you who pretend to be a sportsman. ?>a, §err ®rof, Set ©ie ni^t m^ 5Waffa TOoUteii. (L.) Ah, Count, [you) who would not go to Massa. The pronoun, however, need not be repeated, in which case the verb is in the 3d person. §§171, 173.] The Pronouns— Relative, 109 171. Referring to inanimate objects the following forms may be used (corresponding to borauf, batntt, etc.). Notice again the insertion of an =1 before a preposition beginning with a vowel : WOxaXi, whereat, at which ttJOriJI, in which WOVavtf, on which VdOxnnUv, under which Womit, with which Woju, to which >»oraii6, tttoki, woburrf), wofiir, wonad^, tt)o»on, woyov, wovuber, uiogegen.i 25er ©tn|I ftiorauf (auf tt)etcl;em, or bem) i^ ftge. The chair on which I am sitting. lite gebern, toomit (mtt tuetcfien, or benen) tcl) btefe6 gefcfirtekn ^abi. The pens with which I have written this. These must never be used of persons. Der SKann oon bem, or ttjetd^em {not wouon) t^ rebe. rA« man of whom I speak 172. The relative cannot be omitted. ■Die Sdii6)iX, bic tc^ tefe. The books I read. Ste ©tdbte tuoftott ic^ fl)red;e. The towns lam speaking of. Mti ftiaS tc^ wetg. ^ZZ I know.- 173. The relative can be preceded by no other word than a pre- position : — The house the roof of which was burnt. .... beffen Soi^ (not bai ©ac() befTen) »ertronnt roar. JVie irces arerfer which we sat. Sie Soume, unter bcneii (or roontntcr) wir faf en. Two men, one of whom was a horse-dealer. 3n)ci Tldmet, fon benen bet ©ine tin ^fcrbe^cinbler roar. (Im.) TAe children, all of whim were girls. . . . Sie BKe 3»ab*cn roorcn. Similarly both of which=ml^t beite; some of wUch=1iOn beiien einigc. 1 Also used interrogatively (see § 181). The compounds with other prepositions, being clumsy, are not often fowid. 110 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XI 174. After an expression of time (bet STugenbltd, the moment; bet Sag, etc.) the adverb too may take the place of a preposition and the relative (of. French U moment oil) : For beffen. 178-180.] The Pronouns — Interrogative. 113 G. Interrogative. 178. fwer? who? twnS? whati declined as above, § 177. t»t\your II. (declined like the ad- jective, first form § 71). bev (bt'e, baS) metne, bev (bie, bae) betne, bev(bte,bag)feine, bet (bie, bas) meinige, mine bev (bie, bag) beintge, thine bev (bie, bag) feinige, his, its bev (bie, bag) i^vige, her bev (bie, bag) unfvige, our {bev (bie, bag) \ euvige, f bev (bie, bag) r a^vige, '' bev (bie, bag) ii)vige, their Remember that these are pronouns and cannot be used before a noun. not : bev meiiiige ^\\i, or meinev .?)ut, but metn .^ut 3^v ^o))f unb ber tnetnige, or bet meinc, or tnetnet. 3ii feinem ^au5 unb bem ^lyu^tn, 4>cin ^^rcn, ^^ceut. bev (bie, bag) i|ve, bev (bie, bag) uiif(e)re, bev (bie, bag) eu(e)ve, bev (bie, bag) 3i^re, bev (bie, bag) ijjve, III. (declined like cincc, § 100). meinev, *e, ^eg beinev, »e, -eg feinev, *e, *eg i^vev, ft, 'ti unf(e)ver, *e, ^eg f eu(e)vev, *e, =cg 1 3|)ver, =e, -eg i^ver, »c, ^eg §§183186.] The Pronouns— Indefinite. 115 A friend of mine, etc. : This construction is expressed in German by the personal pronoun : @tn ^reitllb SJOtt Wtit. Similarly: SBerwatlbte OOn tl^nen, relatims of theirs. Or: ©titer »on mefnen greunben, etm'ge »on t&ren SSerwanbten. Several houses of his, ine^rere »on fetnen ipm^exn, etc. 183. Notice a substantival use of these pronouns : tie SMctntgeil (S^tigsn, etc.). My "people," i.e. family, iai SJJettligC (Setnige, etc.). My share or property. Sd; JoBe bag SJfetnige get^an. / have done my duty. S^ue toS Setntge. i'o ^oar cZm*^. K. Indefinite. 184. ^emanb, somebody, anybody. 91temanb, nobody, not... anybody. 3ebevmann, everybody, anybody, man (Fr. on), one, iJiey, people, etc. etwas, something, anything. ni^te, nothing. Slttes, everything, anything. 185. 3emanb, Sttemanb, and 3;ebermann take an sg in the genitive, not being declined in the other cases. Note. — G. 3em(intc8, SJiiemnnbcS, D. Semnnben, 3licm(inbcn, are found, but are not so good. 186. When, for anybody or anything, everybody or everything can be substituted, without changing the sense, they should be translated respectively by ^ebermaim and Mti (cf. § 115). Anybody can show you the way. Sebcrmann (not 3emanb) fann 3|)nen ben 2Beg jetgen, I will believe anything you say. 34) win SlttcS (not itxoai) gtauben, wa^ ©te fageii. 116 The Parts of Speech. [Ohap. XI. 187. Do not render not — anybody, not — anything, by xdi)t 3enianb, ntc^t iivoa.^, but by 9iieutanb and niitfi^ : Have you not seen anything ? Spahtn @ie nt^t^ gefejietl ? 188. StnJttS is often contracted into ^wni, especially in conversation : 3cf| tt)ttt 3^ueu 'tt)0"^ [agen. I will tell you something. 189. 9)?an (like on in French) is of frequent use in German when the statement applies to people in general. We, having no corresponding word, would use in the same sense one, people ; a personal pronoun, we, they ; or the passive : You take the first road to the left. Wian ntmmt bie erjte ©tva^e linfg. With us the doors are shut at\Q o'clock. Set un6 f(|tie§t man t>te X^mtn um 10 U|iv. Wlan mu^ »orft^ttg fetn. One must he carefvl. The dative and accusative are supplied from einer : etnem, etnen ; and the genitive one's is fcin: It pains one.. S-^ f(|)merjt etnen. One must love one's enemies. 9)tan imif feine getnbe tt'ekn. [Exercises 36 and 80.] §§ 190-193.] The Verb. 117 Chapter XII. The Verb. 190. For purposes of conjugation, German verbs can best be divided into the following classes : — A. Auxiliary. D. Derivative and Compound. B. Eegular (Weak). E. Neuter Verbs of Motion. 0. Irregular (Strong). F. Reflexive. G. Impersonal. Eeflexive and Impersonal verbs cannot be said to have any special form of conjugation. 191. Transitive Verbs have two forms called Voices — the Active Voice and the Passive Voice. 192. The Verb Finite has four moods : Indicative, Sub- junctive, Conditional, and Imperative. The Verb Infinite is divided into Infinitive and Participles. 193. There are six tenses — two simple, i.e. having separate forms of their own and not conjugated with the aid of an auxiliary — Present and Imperfect ; four compound, i.e. which are conjugated with the help of an auxiliary — Perfect, Pluperfect, Future, and Future Perfect. The Imperative has also simple forms. The tenses have numbers and persons as in English. 118 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. Xn. A. Auxiliary. 194. i. ^dbtn, to haue. (Auxiliary of transitive and intransitive verbs.) Indicative. Present. bit ^afi er ^at voir fiaOen ©ie^aben J fte ^aben I, thou hast he has we have you have they have bu ^attefi er patte wix flatten (i^x fiattet) ) @te flatten / fte 'gotten Imperfect. I had tlwu hadst he had we had you had they had Perfect. tcf) ^abi gefjabt ) I have had, bu fiottefi gefiabt / etc. Pluperfect. td^ ^atte a,(^aU \Ihad had, bu fiatteft gefjabt / etc. Subjunctive. Present. t^ ^aU bu pabefi er ^o6e wiv l^aben (ifir fiabet) ) @te ^aben J fte fiabeti thou have he have we have tc^ ficitte bu ptteft er ^dtte tt)tr ptten (t|)r pdttet) @te fatten fte flatten Imperfect. Iha thou hadst he had we had you had they had Perfect. \6^ ^tr >»erben ^ahm we shall have (tpr werbet ^oten) ) yow wrt^ ©te werben ^a6en < Aaw fte werbeii :^a6en they will have Future Perfect. t'^ werbe ge^afet , , , „ bu toitft ge^abt j-'^^^^'^'*^' ^aben, etc. etc. SOBJCTNCTIVE. Future. i(^ werbe i)aUn bu ftjccbcft ^abeit er fuerbe {)aben tt)tr werbeti ^abeit (t|)r werbet |akn) ©te werben fiaben fte wevbeii paben Future Perfect. t'c^ wevbe aebabt , , , ^aben ^^^''^^ buh.erbeft3e|,abt T*"''*"'^' f>nf\pii of/1 / I;aben, etc. etc. Conditional. Present. t^ wiirbe ^aben I should have bu TOiirbefi ^abm thou wouldst have er iBurbe paben he would have Wiv wiirbcn paben w should have (t^r wiirbet) fiabeniyow would ©t'ewurben fiabenJ have fte njurben jpaben <% m)omZ(^ Aaw Shorter rorm.' (Same as Imperfect Subjunctive. ) t^ l)atti, etc., I should have Past. t'd^ wi'irbe ^t^aU pabcn \ bu wurbeft gel^abt {laben er tvitrbe ge|)abt |)oben tt)tr tuiirben gejiabt babeit / . (t|!r wiirbet) gei^abt fiabeti ©te wiirben gefiabt fiabeii fte wurben gelj)abt ^aWn j Shorter Form.^ (Same as Pluperfect Subjunctive.) t(|) ^cttte gel^abt, etc., / should have had ' Use these forms in preference, being shorter and more concise. 120 The Parts of Speech, [Chap. XII. Imperative. ^a6e (bit), have thou [|iabet or ^m ('|l'^)]U(j^g y^ The other persons are supplied from the present subjunc- tive, ])ait ex, ^aiin Wix, etc., or by the use of an auxiliary, as : wix ttJoHen ge^en, let us go. Inhnitive. Participles. Pres. (ju) 1 '^abeit to have Pres. ^abenb having Perf. gefiabt (511)1 to have Perf. ge^abt had ^aUn had 195. Idioms'with ^aUxi : 9Jec|t ^aUn, to be right Unrec^t ^aben, to be wrong ^^unger ^okn, to be hungry 2)urft '\)abt\\, to he thirsty 3c^ ^a6e 9tecl;t, I am right ev latte Unvecf)t, he was wrong ^aben ®te .^unger? are you hungry ? fie ^at iitcpt 3)itrf}, she is not thirsty 196. ii. ®cin, to be. (Auxiliary of neuter verbs of motion.) Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Present. ii) bin I am t^fei I be bit btji thou art bu fet(e)fl thou he erijt he is er fei he he mx finb we aire tt)ir fet(e)n we be (tpr fetb) ©te jtnb \ you are (i^r fetet) ®te fet(e)n you be fie ftnb they are fte fet(e)n they be ^ The ju is inserted after any other verb than an auxiliary and a few others given in the, Syntax (§ 429). § 194.] The Verb — Auxiliary, 121 Indicative. Subjunctive. Imperfea. Imperfect. {^wax I was bu ivarft * thou wast er wax he was i^ ware / were bu wdreji thou wert er rodre Ae were ttjtr waren we were (ibr tt)ar(e)t) ) ^ ', ^ ' ' \you were 3 J Pluperfect. \^ twor gewefen bu ttiai;ft er fwar „ Wix toaxtn „ (ipr it»at:(e)t) i @ie hiarctt ) " fte tttorctt c3 Pluperfect. {^ ware gewefen bu wdrefi „ er ware „ wtr wdren „ (i^r wdret) i @te wdren J " fte wdren „ ; .J • Future. t(^ Jt)erbe fein, I shall be bu toit^i fein, etc. , etc. Future. tc^ Werbe fein, / shall be bu wetbeft fein, etc. , etc. 122 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. Indicative. Future Perfect. t't^ Werbe gewefen fettt, IsMl have been, etc. bit toirfi gewefen fettt, etc. Subjunctive. Future Perfect. \6) weite ge»)efen fettt, I shall have been, etc. bu iwefbeft gewefeit few, etc. Conditional. Present. id) lui'irbe fetn, I should be, etc. bit tDiirbefi fetn, etc. Shorter Form. (Same as Imperfect Subjunctive.) t'c^ wave, etc., I should be, etc. Past. \(^ wiirbe getDefett fettt, / slwuld have been, etc. bu wiivbefi getoefen fetn, etc. Shorter Form. (Same aa Pluperfect Subjunctive.) id) ware gewefen, etc.,/s/ioM/(^ have been, etc. Imperative. fei (bu), be {thou) fei(e)n ©te J y ' Inwnitivb. Pres. (ju) fetn to be Perf. getrefen (ju) to have fettt Pabticiples. Pres. fet'enb Perf. gewefen been § 197.] The Verb — Auxiliary. 123 197. iii. aSetbcn, to become. (Auxiliary of the passive.) InI)ICATJ.VJS. Subjunctive. Present. Present. i^ wevbe I become t(|) Werbe I become iu twirft thou hecomest bu totxbift thou become er ttiirb he becomes er itietbe he become tt)ir we.rben we become Voix tuerben we become (tBr roerbet) i , X , ^ } you become @te werben ) (t^r werbet) ■> , , !- you become @ie werben / " ^t tcevben they become fte Werben they become Imperfect. Imperfect.^ xi) njuvbe I became id; wiirbe / became bu IDUtbeji thou becamest bit ttJiirbeji thm became er Wurbe he became er *»«rbe he became Wiv tDurben we became wit njitrben we became (t^rwurbet) ^ , . 1/, ^ }• you became @te wurben ; ■jte tt5urben they became Perfect. t^ 6tn geworben, I have be- come, etc. bit Btft geworben, etc. Pluperfect. t'c^ tvat gettJorben, / had be- come, etc. bu twarft geworben, etc. (t|ir wfirbet) a , X. , „ u r '/OM became @te roiirben / "^ jte Witrben they became Perfect, i^ fet geworben, / have be- come, etc. bu fei(c)fl: geworben, etc. Pluperfect. tdp iwSrc geworben, / had be- come, etc. bu tviirefl: geworben, etc. 124 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. Indicative. Fvture. \6) werbe werben, / shall be- come, etc. bu wtvft werben, etc. Future Perfect, t^ werbe geroorben feitt, I shall have become, etc. bu ttttrfi genjorben fcin, etc. Subjunctive. Future. t^ njevbe werben, I shall be- come, etc. bu werbeji werben, etc. Future Perfect. t^ werbe geworben fcin, / shall have become, etc. bu werbeji gewovben feiit, etc. Conditional. Present. t'c^ wiirbe werben, / should be come, etc. bu wurbejl werben, etc. Shorter Form. (Same as Imperfect Subjunctive.) id) wfirbe, etc., I come, etc. Past. i(|) wiirbe geworbeti fcht, 7 should have become, etc. bu ttjiirbep geworbeii fcht, etc. Shorter Form. (Same as Pluperfect Subjunctive.) id; rocire geworben, etc., I should have become, etc. Imperative. werbe (bu), become (thou) [«)erbet(i^r)]U,,„„,( ) Infinitive. Pres. (5u) merben to become Perf. gett)0rben(5U) to haw be- fciw coni« Pabticiplbs. Pres. tverbenb becoming Perf. geworben become §§ 198, 199.] The Verb— Auxiliary. 125 198. SSSecben means to become, to get, to turn, to grow (all denoting a change of state) : er tt)irb jorntg eg ttJtrb warm aSaffer wtrb su ©^ er tt)trb alt er tft alter geworben icaS mirb au^ mix werben ? Ae becomes angry it gets wa/rm water turns to ice he grows old he has groivn older what will become of me ? [Exercise 37. 199. The Auxiliary Verbs of Mood, i. ICSoUen, / will, wish to, am about to. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Present. i^ win tc| mUi bu ttiiap bu WOttefi -Pe'/- P«-rtic er ttjitt er wotte gewoUt roir wotten wir wofien (t^r ttJoUt) \ ©t'e iDotten / (t^r tt)ottet) ) ©t'e woUen / fte wotten fte wctten Imperfect. /mper/ect tct) wottte, etc. i^ ttJOttte, etc. t(^ liate gewottt, tc| werbe woHeit, etc. 126 The Parts of Speech, [Chap. XII. ii. erbe miigen, etc 128 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. vi. Siu»;fctt, / dare, may, am. allowed. Indicative. Subjunctive. Preseiii. Present. tc^ bitrfe bu blivfefl Perf. Fartie. er biirfe geburft n)tr biirfen (t:^r biirfet) ) @te biivfen J jte biirfen tcj) barf bu barffi er borf tt)tr biirfen (t^r biirft) ) Bit biirfen I fte biirfen Imperfect. ii) burfte, etc. tdb ^abe geburft, t Imperfect. tc^ biirfte, etc. (^ werbe biirfen, etc. vii. Saffett, to let, have (i.e. cause to be, French fahe). Present. \6) laffe bit (Sf t (taffefl) er lii^t tt)tr tafen (t^r la^t) ) @te laffen ) fte taffen Imperfect. \^ Iteg bn Itegt (itef e|i) er Iteg ttJt'r Ite§en (i^rlte^t) 1 @te tte^en J fte Itegen Present. ia; laffe bu loffep er taffe tt)ir laffen (t^r raffet) » @te laffen J fte laffen Imperfect. tcf) liege bu lief eji er lief e tt)ir lief en (t:^r lief et) i @ie lief en I fte lief en Pej/. Partic gelaffen i^ ^obe gelapn, irf) werbe lafen, etc. §§ 200-202.] The Simple Regular Verb. 129 200. These verbs require no ju before the infinitive following : 3^ mug »erreifen. / rrmst go away from home. 2)er Stenev Witt urn 2 VL^v fommen mfiffen. The mavrservant wUl have to come at 2 o'clock. 201. When these verbs -occur with an infinitive, their past participles also become infinitives : / have wished, 3^ ^abt gewottt ; but I have wished to come. 3(^ ^dbi fomineit fooUen (not gewoJlt). (£r ^at fc^reiben mii^en,aiex er ^at iitd^t gewottt. He has been obliged to write, hut he has not wanted to {do so). ^a.U\\ @te 3|>re ©ttefel ^ju^ett laffen? Have you had your boots cleaned ? [Exercise 38.] 202. B. The Simple Regular Verb. 1. rfaget)j @te fagen / fte fagen fte fagen 130 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. Indicative. Subjunctive. Imperject. Im/perfect. I said, was saying. I said, was or were saying. t(^ fagte bu fagteft er fagte wtr fagten (t^r fagtet) j @te fagten / jte fagten t(f> fagte bu fagtefi er fagte toix fagten (t|)r fagtcOl @te fagten . fte fagten Perfect. Perfect. ' I have said, I said. I have said, I said. t^ flak gefagt bu {ia|t gefagt, etc. tc^ ^aU gefagt bu |ia6ejt gefagt, etc. Pluperfect. Pluperfect. I had said. I had said. t'^ ^cAk gefagt bu ^aiti^ gefagt, etc. ii) ^atti gefagt bu jiatteft gefagt, etc Future. Future. I shall say. I shall say. j'cl) njerbe fagen bu wtrfi fagen, etc. i^ werbe fagen bu wevbeji fagen, etc. Future Perfect. Futwe Perfect. I shall have said. I shall have said. t(^ werbe gefagt ^aben bu wirft gefagt jjaben, etc. ii) tt»erbe gefagt ^aben bu werbejt gefagt paben, etc. 203.] The Simple Regular Verb. 131 Conditional. Present. I should say. \i) witrbe fagen t»u ttjitrbefi fagen^ etc. Shortened Form. (Ssrnie aa Imperfect Subjunctive. ) (t^ fagte, etc.) Not common in regular verbs on account of its identity with the Imperf. Indie. Past. I should have said. tc^ tt)urbe gefagt ^a&en bu ttJurbefi gefagt m»en Shortened Form. (Same as Pluperfect Subjunctive.) x^ ^attt gefagt, etc. Imperative. ' fage (bu) say (thou) I [fagt (t^r)] fogert : (t!)r)J 1 i@te / say (ye) Pakticiples. Pres. fagenb, saying Perf. gefagt, said Infinitive. Pres. (ju) fagen, to say Perf. gefagt (ju) ^aten, to have said In the same way: — (I'eben, to love; fragen, to ask; fn^feii, to fed; maiden, to make. 203. To conjugate a verb interrogatively, place the subject after the finite verb : ©age id^ ? ©agt ber ^err ? Do I say ? Does the gentleman say f Spat er gefagt ? SBurbe ber ^etv gefagt fta6en ? Has he said f Woidd the gentleman have said ? 133 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. 204. To conjugate a verb negatively, place the negation in a simple tense after the verb ; in a compound tense (generally) before the infinitive or perfect participle : t^ fage nt^t. I do not say. ic^ {labe bte @:prac^c ntc^t getetnt* / home not learned the language. t^ werbe bte O^ra^e m'^t ternen, etc. And interrogatively with a negative : ©agt er nt'dftt ? Does he not say ? ©agtcber -&err mc^t? Did not the genUeman say ? ^aben fte bte @^5ra^e ntc&t geternt? Ham they not letwned the language ? 2. Anomalies in the Spelling of Verbs. 205. Verbs in scitt always, and those in scttt sometimes, drop the C before another simple c» They both always omit the c of the termination sctt, e.g. : tc^ table / blame t^ tt)anb(e)re / wander bu tabetji bu wanberji er tabeW ev wanbert wit tabetn wiv wanbern (t^r tabett) (t^t wanbert) @ie tabetn @ic wanbern fte tabeltt fte wanbern Imperfect tabelte Imperfect wanberte P. Partic. getabelt p. Partic. gewaiibevt §§ 206-208.] The Simple Regular Verb. 133. 206. Those in sbctt, »tctt, =ficn, °f|)en, 'Qxitn, s^nen, 4^tnen, require, for convenience in pronunciation, the in- sertion of an c in the 2d and 3d singular and 2d plural present indicative; throughout the imperfect; and in the perfect participle : i^ 6ete Ipray i^ betcte i(^ ved&ne leomt tc^ rec^nete bu fcetefi t>u 6etctcfi bu rec|)ttcfi bu xii^mUft er betet er betete ex red^net er recpncte wtr beteit voix beteten wtr red^nen wix rec^ncteit (t^r betct) (i{)v betctet) (i^x rec^net) (t^ic re^nctet) @ie beteti @te beteten ®te re(^nen @te vec^nctet fte beten jte beteten jte re^nen ffe rec^neten P. Partic. gebetet P. Partic. gerec^net So also : er leugnet, fnofpct, at^met, babet, vojlet, etc. 207. Those with an § sound before the stxt pi the infini- tive — namely, sfen, ^^en, =fci^en, and »jen — require for the same reason an e before the sfi of the 2d person only, e.g. : t^ paffe I fit (^ tt)unf(|e / wish i^ tro^c Fdefy bu ^Jaffcfl bu tt)unfd;e)i bu tro^eji er }5aft, etc. er wunfc[;t, etc. er tro|t, etc. 208. There are a good many verbs of common use in German formed mostly from foreign words, by adding the termination sfren (sometimes spelt «teren) to the foreign root.^ These take no ges in the perfect participle : raftren to shave perf part, raftrt (not geraftrt). ftubiren to study „ jiubirt curiren io ewe „ curtrt [Exercise 39.] ^ Derived from the Latin -are, -ere, -ire, through the French, 134 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. 3. Mixed Conjugations. 209. The following are so called because they partake of the nature of regular (or weak) and irregular (or strong) verbs. They resemble the latter in that they change the root vowel in the imperfect indicative and perfect participle, and the former by taking the terminations of the regular verb. ndn. Imp. Indie. p. Partio. Imp. Subj. SSrennen to bwrn bxamte gebrannt brennete iBringen to bring bva^tt gebra^t 6ract;te Senlen to think ba(|te gebacf)t bai^U Sennen ^ to know fannte gefannt fennete yitnmn to name nannte gcnannt nennete Stcnnen to run vaitjite gevaiint rennete ©enben to send fanbte gefanbt (orgefenbet) fenbete SBSenben to turn wanbte gewanbt (or gewenbet) tvenbete SSBiffeni to know ttjugte gewu^t tuu^tc ^ Eettttcn is "to know" in the sense of to he acquainted with, and is used of persons and things : ti^ lenne biefen .gcttn, xi^ tenne ba« 5aii8. SSiffeit is to know some fact : \^ tueif kaf Sjeutfc^tanb ein J?oifetrci(i^ ifi. / Tcnow (the fact) that Oermwny is an empire. It rarely has an accusative (except an indefinite neuter) : i^ luct^ e§, i^ tveip iai, etc. S(^ >i)eig cincn bvittcn Oit. (ScH.) / hnow {of) a third place, i.e. tliefact that a third place exists. 1210,211.] The Simple Regular Verb. 135 210. 2Btffen is thus conjugated : — Pres. Indie, t'^ wet§, bu wetf t, er wet^, tt)ir wiffen, t^r Wi^t, jte tt)ifeu. Imperfect tc^ Wugte, etc. Pres. Subj. t($ wiffe, t>u wtfTefi, er wife, etc. Imperfect id) Wligte, etc. imperative wiffe (t>u) [wi^t (i^r)], Wiffen @ie. 4. The Passive Voice. 211. Conjugation of. gelobt tuetben, to be praised. Indicative. Present, I am praised. td^ weibe gelobt bu wirji „ er wirb „, iDir werben „ (t|)r werbet)-! ©ie werben /" fte werben „ Imperfect. I was praised. td& ttjurbe getobt bu wurbejl „ etc. Subjunctive I am or be praised. i^ werbe gelobt bu werbeji „ er werbe „ ivir njerben „ (i^v tt)erbet)| @ie werbeit J " fte ttjerben „ Imperfect, I was or were praised. id) tt)itrbe getobt bu wiirbeft „ etc. 136 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. Indicative. Perfect. I have been praised. \i) 6itt getofet worben ^ bu 6ift „ „ etc. Pluperfect. I had been praised. tc^ Wat gelofct wovben bu ttuefi „ „ etc. Futwe. I shall be praised. td^ werbe getobt tuerben bu wivft „ „ etc. ■Fviure Perfect. I shall have been praised. tdj) wevbe gelobt teorben fctn bu tt)ivii „ .. .. etc. SUBJUNOHVE. Perfect. I have been praised. td^ fei getobt tporben bu fci(e)ft „ „ etc, Pluperject. I had been praised. \6) Ware gelofct worbeii bu tworeft „ „ etc. Future. I shall be praised. {^ wevbe gcto6t werben bu «)erbe|i „ „ etc. Future Perfect. I shall have been praised. tc^ werbe getofct worbcu fcin bu werbeji „ „ „ etc. Conditional. Present. I should be praised. x6) wiivbe getobt werben bu wiirbefi „ „ etc. Shortened Form. (Same as Imperfect Subjunctive.) t^ wurbe gelott, etc. Past. I should have been praised. tc^ Wiirbe gelofct worben fcin bu wilrbefi „ „ „ etc. Shortened Form. (Same as Pluperfect Subjunctive.) iij ware getobt worben, etc. ^ For getooi'ten. harsh. The oe= is dropped, as flcloSt Bewovtcn would sound J 212.] The Simple Regular Verb. 137 Imperative. werbe (bu) getofct, ie (thou) Infinitive. Pres. getofct (ju) merbeit to be praised Perf. geIo6t tt)orben (ju) fein «5 a> - I I s= . f^ 3f ^^ *~* A^ " S -g g .Si-sg o3 *- a -S e -Si O Q s a» s-^ v^ \S^ sO s£> nO sO sO 0> &> Q> 41 U Oil cf) sO vo CS3 C ■«-» « a* O O « <3 Ci d sO vX^ nO sO sO sO 2s> !3 rO ^O "^ -O « S S M ^ — « s^ s s s s ^ s s g I g « J § 222.] List of Irregular Verbs. 145 oj tn SaJSEsSaT «io S,<33SSScO<33 CO« ^ Si § -« ^ § S <33 S QQ , ^3^ fc -t "» fj" g «u >. " "S. £ 146 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. -w tip c* M lC»N s e* a> OS ■& <» rti. «t J5 s=^ di. .Si. ia=- e» Ja^ r; o «> CO 5i «33 t< tL. . 1^ S^ g % >8"^ ■s- S^ tt^ e. .o tt C tt S C -*— v5 Q— - ^S~- C^ *-^— ^*^ ° ^ 4A <^ &> Q,i ^> a> a> cn ^ o Ol u o) - S^ .** .** .** ^ '^ ^ ® « g' ® ® 1 1 ® ® § 222.] List of Irregular Verbs. 147 O a « s -^4 1=»N I-l 3t «w (til 1— > OU iOv o^ A> Q> «> en «> to cn " " S^ s£^ w 0) oi C31 CS5 -• s-> -^ -ti •" o -^ e o CD CD 0^ sC>. sC^ «;^ .S .& 13. ^ SS V s i i 3 I .§> ■ Si, S ea 05 'e S -§ Sis ^Sh s « « <3 "3 "S a* -i «i oi -2: -a "C .5 j-» ** es « cs ai a* tu .g SI "5 3 "d 43 e i 1-^ w g3 za M i$e a -t3 1! a a ^ P, S s 4§ '^ H *^s -P r— 1 ^^ ? If s -,?s H » iT >9P^ 148 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. Xn. tj B Plj S S 5 a g -b*' B s s ja =« .a- 1 2 s 1 J - - S s 5 i / h M O 1 1 n S s o s e Is 4> s s O 1 P^ u u fi> Q> a> a> e^ cn w* C3 <35 «J «S5 CO «) «> CO C» a CO O) E o> en «) US ^ ^ <33 1 S 5 s 1 CJ g o CO o 1 1 ,_^ U -s !ij g w* 3 1 1 t 1 i 1 } ll f^ 1 1 s o 53 I 1 Ill , i s- I- s .? 1 ^ ^ a» JO « a* As CO c3 1 •1 § 222.] List of Irregular Verbs, 149 I St, S: i*- «- c- ^ &» &> tSD. -4-» = .£* S' 11= S >4 .= £- -*^ *« '*2 a -s e "e. «>.•=-»-*— -— -»- -— . c^ = 3 t I u o i 3 I •§ € ^ !£> tT (D 3 s va °i ». »»? T .3 IS ^~. DO pi 5 lo m s s ^5$ at in I a -^ <0 Q} S<3 8 "3 0< IP .3 ° Sea a s s!-ac3s;s;s;&;sgss® 150 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. Zn. S » < Q !zi ts « rH •s- g: ^ fc e: 11= es ^ e «i Q> T^ u w Q* «i in ts» o <33 o en Qj Csj cj CsJ <3j ca oj t» 03 en tn en S^ C O -ail TT M i-f ^ g g g "if .«-,«- ' «■ e- "«- ^ ^ lO >». J3 .« = 5 " o £:SS^£S^§lS:l:^i§^l"44 « e - *= 5 S -5 S It: B :S a» .■»: "t ,; «^ s S g § 222.] List of Irregular Verbs. 151 s -e B S ^ S:* ©■ ^ >©• JB~ 2 04 04 Q> 0> "^ CS3 <33 €SJ CSS en- s S S 8 ' S ? -o S) s c "i R § § s S = f: 'c- f: S: a: "S S O) C33 o 03 en cn tsj «> ft> -«-* £ ^ fi fi a sOx |,se,je:je:g|: l§:k^§:§:§:^$. 03 Vs^ I I s s — «* o> IS rt S £ iO .§ -£{ s ^ 5> 5> c* '5 S 5 C w !-• t* « I ® (y ® ® ® fi 'S fi -S .5 „ ^ fi ^ S fi fi S "S- iS "S" «• «■ >^ :a IS 1 U § a, -^ bo a 1" :^ BO *^- fl K! bo 60-3 a ■ g£ a, °» ' ? -a •S.S S !j .2* ee 1- « •6- J3 "S' Gj 152 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. o t-t (Si- ce, tji. O g (Li " g g " rf n g ttig-t£^|£tl«^<§-- r g 1 - ■S ►» ..e I = e « c « ft* a> o g g " § 222.] List of Irregular Verbs. 153 «A -«-» a ^«-* t£>> "t* -M ■♦-* -w* . SS JSv -4-» (ji: s As t* -*-» c ■*-* ^ a> ciil te= ftj" ■TIH &> » (^ -«>>* ID >£t\ 'S CD -*♦ ■ ro _ |S en >. lO ts ti «: «5 e t^ £ ss e OA ^o ^ e I ■e- 3 «s « O 6> 3 a o 1= 0* o ii^ :-» s-» 'S ^ ;-» JO «> >-* ii ■s &> '5 1 s ■8 u s % s> <33 cn <» =. <35 t» » " » $> £ • s (JEL o v.* ■— H-* « tsa. «s «s •4-» «» *^» >o -«-» u c JO <35 «3 « 'Si o "S- o g> s-» ja S >* £ £. S •*-> 3-» a i: "S -a iJ s "^ V i 1 rO 1} ^ f a -^ i •2- ■3 'fe 1 I 1 1 .«■ 1 « W W W W W )?l « ^3 S? a S? S? 154 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. Ph S4 o a 6 P5 P4 . >6" ° S - ** 5 iS- O S 'o .S -Si o $> ^ . fi £! s &> &> is T«t A> ^> C» « 03 o t» 03 CSj C» s 2 3 >g «■ 5 „ S s s "a s fi S s •: <3J g S I I ■§ ° s ^ OS !S eS ^ ^ 00 IS-s § -i s s ^ § 3 e SI, «S, tt tt ■& g ^ ts S e S ^ a K? Ti CI 3 ^ CD p a fs .!« M s s «• e- ti s* f> XJ *s -. CD «■ g -3 43 fi " g ^ - o u s« S s .1 I S,1i © 54 ^ ■8- a . ■C -S 111 §225.] Irregular Verbs. 155 223. Some obsolete perfect participles, now only used as adjec tives : 6eHommen, oppressed erjaficn (obs. form of er:^oben), gcfpattcn, spiu Bcr^O^Icn, concealed (from ecrfc^oHcn, lost sight of^ CerWOrren, confused, perplexed ©CtO^cn, avenged (utigerO^Ctl— Ebers) for gerfi^t is rare. 224. The compounds of irregular verba are also irregular ; — ctfc^Iagcn to slay ctf^tug, erf^Iagen from f(^tagen tteifejcn to provide, etc. Derfa^, Derfcjcn „ fe:^cn but notice the following, which are no* really compounds of irregular verbs, but of substantives derived from these verbs : — icontragen to move (in com- fr. atitrag, bcantragte, bcanttagt „ auftrog, teaufttagte, Bcouftragt „ SWittcib, Bcmittetbete, bcmttteibct „ SUotJf^tog, ratK(|)tctgtc, gcrot^- Wtagt „ ^mi^ahe, ^miliahte, ge^anb^oBt ,, SfabcBrc^c, rabeirccf>tc, gcrabc- „ ?tnIof, Berantaftc, »eranIo?t „ SSBattfaJrt, waHMrtc, gctoattfa^tt roinfo^rcn io comply „ — , wittfa^rtc, (ge)tt>tttfof rt aWan tatSf Slagte Wa^ man t§un fottte. (6.) 2%«3/ «?eM6eraie(i upon what was to be done. Note. — This holds good of many verbs derived from nouns, and only by a coincidence similar in form to irregular verbs, ff^wctten to provide with from ©(^tnellc, f(^W)ct(te, gefc^tucKt a threshold Sejttingen to "ferule" „ Sluingc, SejWingte, Scjtuingt [Exercise 82.] mittee, etc.) fceaufttagen to commission Bemitteiben to pity xaV)\i)Ua,txi ) (or berat^= > to deliberate Wagen) ) 5onb5fl6en to Jiandle rabe6ic($en to break on the wheel ocranlaffcn to occasion wotffa^ren to go on a pil- ' Stmant) tji stvfi^oKen, is missing ; all trace of him is lost. 156 The Parts of Speech. Ciiap. XII. Pactitives. 225. These are verbs meaning "to cause to do" a thing, e.g. faHeit, to fell, i.e. to cause to fall ; eittfiJ^Iafettt, to cause to fall asleep, etc. They are similar in form and connected with the corresponding intraftsitivea, and in most cases are formed from them by modifying or changing the vowel. Compare English to lie and to lay, to faU and tofeU.^ Intkansitivb. Factitivb. bttngen to press forwa/rd brangen to press, urge einft^tofcn to fall asleep etnf^Iafctn to luU to sleep erffllten to get cold ntalttn to chill erUarfen to go strong erflarfen to strengthen ertrtntcn to be drowned ertranten to drown fasten to go in a convey- fiijrcn to lead, take fatten " tofaU [ance' fatten tofeU fatten tofall fatten tofell fitefen to flow flogen toflsat{c3,Txae to flow) ■ ^cingen to be hanging ^angen to hang up (a coat, etc.) ^aften to stick, be fastened ^eften to sUtch, pin (cause to stick) lauten to sound Iduten to ring (cause to sound) Itcgen to lie (egcn to lay faufen to drini (of ani- mals) erfoufen to be drowned (fa- miliar) erfoufen to drown fougcn to suck faugen to suckle fii^otten to sound (with a f(!^ctten(intr.)aS Sinb ein. 3l$ erittlte mi^. / catch cold. ©te et'ttaitieit baS axmt SJicr. ®r fuSft fcincn ©ojn in'S Sweater. ©ct gSrliet fSBte ben SSaum. ©er ©(differ fiBfit bie |)oIi» Pcimme. yAe boatman floats the logs. ©er ©tenet ffangte ben 3Jod an ben 92agel. 158 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. ©cr ^fcit ^Bfteie an bet SBonb. The airrow stucJe in the waM, Almost only figuratively : ©fl« Unttt »tct BcfTer. Tlwi sounds mvxk better. (£S lantet Mjie fotgt. It runs as follows. Set aSIctiltft (pencil) lag auf bem Sff^e, n :^at auf bciti 2:tf($e aelegett. ^, ^ , 'j-see ertrinfcn. Tlie ox drank. > ^iS)a\ltn=tosound'shriUy and clearly (as opposed to law ten, to give forth a souTid). Scr 3Juf filjaiit burt^ ben Sffiatb. The cry resovmds through the wood. ©ie SWctaUpIatte f^attt. TAe ^/aie 0/ metai rings. Sag ^ferb fiiftttiimmt iiber ben glug. ©ei; ®etfi betfii^ttiinbei. The ghost disappears. ©a0 ®^tff finlt. 3c^ ft^e in ber £aubc {arbour). et:= fifjtoenbet fein ganjeS Ser= mSgen (/ort«ne). ®er geinb [enemy) fenitc mejrcre ©($ifFc. 3^ fe#e ben ©tujt in bic 8. Ss 226 228] Derivative and Compound Verbs. 159 Set $)unb f^cingt iibet ben Sic Sruppen {troops) fftteng ©tflben {ditch). ten bte ©rude in bic Suft. Sie ©trof en f^ttengen. To water the streets. ^exitntS)tet{candlestic]c)^tf)i 3c^ fette bcn S. ouf boS S5. auf bent Siiffet {sideboard). Scr SuftbaHon (Wtooji) fteig* ©it fteigeet ben ^reis, bie in bie SDSotfen {clouds). SWiet^e {rent). Set aWoun ttinlt. gr ttSnit bo« f fetb. D. Derivative and Compound Verbs. 226. As regards their formation, German verbs may be divided into three classes : — 1. Simple Verbs, as : toben, to praise, ne^men, io take. 2 Derivative Verbs : vetntgeil, to dean ; beto^nen, to re- ward. 3. Compound Verbs: au^legen, to lay out; ^intevge^ien, to deceive. I. Derivative (Inseparable) Verbs. 227. At present we are only concerned with one class of derived verbs, ie. those formed with a prefix, which, with the exception of i^intet, Wtber, and i)ofl, does not now exist as a separate word. 228. The prefixes used in forming derived verbs are the following : — &e ge et cnt (em|)) ucr mV{\ mibei; jer also, in most cases, ^iniw and HoIl 160 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. 229. In these verbs the accent falls on the root of the simple verb etitra'tpen, wtberle'gen. 230. The conjugation is exactly the same as that of the simple verb, except that the ge= of the perfect participle is dropped. tct) errei^e, / reach bu enet^jl er evreic^t, etc. p.^. ervei^t inf. (ju) etret4)en bu i^intergeljji er ^tnterge^t, etc. p.-p. ^tntergarigen inf. (ju) :^tnterge^eii These are known in German by the name of Inseparable Verbs, in contradistinction to those in § 233. 231. There is a class of verbs, not, as some of them seem to be, formed by prefixing a nonn or adjective to a simple verb, but derived direct from a compound substantive. These are treated as simple verbs, and take the ge^ in the perfect participle. antWOrten ' to answer branbmarfcn frii^fluifcn ^anii^aben ^ofmeiUcrn futjTOcilen langweiten ntut^mafen taithtt^tn to suspect to brand to breah/ast to handle to tutor to pass the time to "hmrey (e»i- from SlnttBOtt „ Jtrgwo^n ,, Stanbmarf „ |)anb5o5e ,, ?)oftneiflcr „ Surjweite „ Songeroeite to presume to break on the wJieel 9iat>ebre$e geontWJOttct gcargwojnt gcBranbmortt QtftoWMt gejanb^ott (§ 224) gc^ofmetHett gcfutjTOcttt gelangweUt gemut^ma^t gcrabebxc4it {§ 224) ' 3if; iintiuocte bit, auf brine Stage, ic() beantwoite ten SJrief. § 232.] Derivative and Compound Verbs. 161 taWi^laQm to deliberate from 3JatJf^(ag 1 gcrtitK^fagt (§ 224) rc(^tf«ttgen tojustify „ gete^tfetttgt f^ulmeijlern to schoolmaster „ ©c^utnteifj \ix gef^utmet(lert uttjctlcn to judge „ Urt^cit gcurtjeilt waHfaJrcn to go on a pil- „ Sattfojrt gcttJflDfaprt grimage wc^Hagcn to lament „ SBeJKagc gcii)c:^ffagt Wjci^agen to prophesy ,, gcweiafagt wctfctfcrn to emulate „ 2Bcfteifcr gctBcttcifert Wcttcrteitc^tcn to "sheet" -lighten „ ■ gwettcrtcue^tct .^o It appears as ant in antwort, answer ; aiit% visage. §232.] Derivative and Compound Verbs. 163 (6) Removal or deprivation. eHtfcffeln, to unfetter enttdUfcn, to run away cntbeicn, to discover {remove the covering from}). So also : etlttoben, to unload; ctlttctf ftt (ace. and dat.), to snatch away; Ctlttciufc^Cn, to undeceive; Cntjaubctn (aoc.). to break tJte spell. (c) In a few instances it expresses a removal into a state : — entfc(;tafen, to/all asleep, expire entjitnben, to inflame. So also : cnt6Jc§en, to lay bare; cntJWtien, to set at variance. (3) @C= is one of the most expressive particles, and conveys the idea of completing or attaining an object. (o) A proceeding forth from, generally in an upward direction : — etgie^cn, to pour forth crbaiteh, to erect, build up crTtingcn, to resound. So also : tX^tUxi, to lift up; Ctff()Ctncn, to appear. (6) A getting into a state : — exWat^tn, to wake up erfranlett, tofaU ill enot^CIt/ to get red, blush. So also : etbunfeltl, to grow dark ; erjfirnen, to get angry. (c) Completion or attainment : — f(^ta3en=to beat, crfd;Tagen, to beat to the utmost, to slay Ctproben (from tie ^robe, test), to put completely to the test erfablCII/ to get information by travelling ahout, to experience, to learn greifcn, to seize at ; crgtctfcn, to seize and get into one's power. So also : crrcttetl, to rescue; ctftieren, tofrexxA, benunib; et^ren, to hear and fulfil (a prayer, etc.). 1 To uncover is aSbeden. 164 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. SII. (d) Obtaining or acquiring by means of the action expressed by the verb : — Cttetl^en, to obtain iy reaching, to attain. eriangen, to get by putting out the hand for (langcil), to obtain crbettetn, to get by begging. So also : eifcagen, to ask-for (and get) ; erf^ltcf HI, to shoot-at (and get); eiTttigen, to wrestU-for (and get); erpteffen, to get by pressure, extort. (e) It forms faotitives from adieotives : — ntlaxen, to maJie clear, explain eifrif^en, to freshen. So also: erbtttern, to embitter; txWtittm, to widen, enlarge; eimaf igen, to moderate. ■ (4) ®t'» This particle has now no distinct signiGcation. It ori- ginally meant together, but this meaning is now -almost entirely lost. In a few verbs it denotes a lasting action. btauc^en, to need ; geBraU($en, to need for a time, make use of (oten, to hear ; QiffOtm, to listen always to, to answer to, to belong to (its present meaning). In the form ge^or^dl it means to obey. So also: gettenfen, to remember; getvdbten, to grant; gciDtnnen, to gain; gClDO^nen, to accustom. (5) Wti^', (a) Error:— ntff a^tcn, to estimate wrongly, to undervalue. So also : tttt^beuten, to misinterpret. (6) The opposite of the simple verb : — bittigen, to approve-of; mt^btdigen, to disapprove-of. So also : mtgltngen, to fail, (6) ^tXf denotes, in general, completion, even up to destruction or f^lure ; hence frequently reverses the meaning of the verb. §232.] Derivative and Compound Verbs. 165 • (a) Error J — t>nte(^nm,^ to miscalculate Bcrtaufen, to run the vyrong way, to stray t)eiletnen, to unlearn, forget So also : Dcrbrurfen, to misprint ; »crttetben, to disguise ; »er» ftfltcitcn,' to make a mistake in uniting. (6) Removal, destruction, deterioration : its commonest use, and differing from enfc (see tliis) in that it implies that destruction or loss ensues from the removal : braui^cn = to me, need t)crtrau$en, to use-up miet^cn = to Jdre oetmietjcn, to let Jciratjen = to take in marriage Berjettatjett, to give in marriage faufcn = to buy scriaufcn, to sell So also: Bcrfcannen, to banish; Betituten, to bleed to death; BetiiO^en, to push away ; BCrt^etlett, to distribute. (c) Sometimes it denotes loss, etc. with the idea only of removal from sight, not actual movement from a place (cf. English up): Betbtnben, to bind-up {a wound, etc. ) Bergraben, to bury Bcrnogetn, to nail-up So also : Bernttfc^en, to mix-up; BerbttUClt, to build-up. {d) Like ec: and ie=, it forms verbs from nouns and adjectives, generally implying to make, become, provide with : Bcrtofltcn, to turn to coal, to char BCrcngen (from eng), to make narrow Berjtlbcril, to provide with silver, to plate So also: Berarmen, to impoverish; Bcrbeffem, to improve; Bet= golben, to gild; BCtgrofcrn, to enlarge. Note. — It differs in this use from fies and tS' by implying destruction of the original state : oerengcn is to impair the original state of breadth. 8Ses would mean to cover with, as : Bcnfiffen, to wet (cover with wet), ©ts denotes simply to make, to get, as :■ cttslten, to get cold. ■> 3(^ ^oJie mt(!ji »etre(i^iiet (tecfc^cieSen, serftjvoii^cn, etc.). I have made a mistake (in counting, writing, speaking, etc.). 166 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XIL (7) 3**-' denotes destruction, violent separation, flying to piece* ; jerBtei^Cn, to break in pieces jerfc^netben, to carve JCrflie^cn, to meU away So also : jcrfloretl, to destroy ; jerfpaltcn, to split in pieces ; JCr» fheucn, to scatter in all directions. (8) SsOUs implies completion ; full: DoUbrtngen, „r,,, J to accomplish (9) ^VIittXf=liehi7id, figuratively un(2erAa>u2 ; JtntfrlafTcn, to leave {in a will) ^tntetgcjen, to cZeceiw So also : ^tnterbrtltgen, to inform secretly ; ^ttltnl^alten (dative and accusative), to leeep secret from. (10) ^iSi^tt=against, English with in wUlistand, etc. . toibeitegen, to refute teiOnffXt^in, to contradict So also : Wiin^t^tn, to viitlistand ; mtbctrufcn, to retract. In many of these derived verbs it is almost impossible without a knowledge of etymology, and sometimes even with that knowledge, to deduce the meaning from the simple verb — the changes it may have passed through having been lost trace of ; but in a great number of instances, the simple verb, adjective, etc. being known, it is easy to discover the meaning of the derivative. Thus : (i) Derglu^en; gtiiben, to glow, Uer* {hyb) = loss, destruction; hence: to lose the glow, to die out. (2) eratubtn ; mute, tired, er» (by c) factitive : to make tired, to weary. (3) betvolten ; SBoIfe, cloud, it' (by c) covering : to cover with clouds, to cloud, [Exercises 84 and 85.] §§ 233, 236.] Compound (Separable) Verbs. 16T II. Compound (Separable) Verbs. 233. Compound Verbs are those which are formed by adding a prefix — which is in itself a separate word, generally a preposition, but also an adverb, a noun, or an adjective — to the simple verb : auS, prep, out au^gef^en, to go out fovt, adv. away forttragen, to carry away ©tatt, noun, ^tece jiattftnbett, to tah place Wa^X, adj. true tt)a|)riie{»men, topercewe 234. These are generally known as Separable Verbs because, under certain circumstances, the prefix is detached from the verb and placed (usually) at the end of the sentence. 235. The prefix is always detached in a principal sentence, out only in the simple tenses, i.e. : (i) the present indicative (rarely subjunctive). (2) the imperfect indicative (rarely subjunctive). (3) the imperative mood. Examples : abf(^rci6en, to copy. (i) i^ f^cetbe ben 33rief aft. (2) ii) ]6:fxieb ben iBrtef ab. (3) f«i^tei6ett ©ie ben 33nef a6, 236. In a subordinate sentence,^ when the verb always comes last, it is not detached : Der SBrtef ben t'^ foefcen ofifi^^teifte. 2)er 3 3r>ef ben \6) geftern tA^H^nib, 1 Only when, owing to the omission of rrnnw and 06, inversion takes place (see § 341), is the verb separated in a subordinate sentence, as : giilie et bieSmol na^, ■mmit ev ti metjt Seceuen, if he yielded this time he would not regret it. IfiS The Parts of Speech. [Chap. SH. 237. The gcs of the perfect participle and the ju of the . infinitive are inserted between the prefix and the verb : ic^ ^aie ben Sn'ef abgcfd^riebeiu tc& tt)unf4te ben 23vtef abjufci^retben. ber S5rtef ben tc^ gejiern ab^t^i^vititn ^aU. t^ werbe ben SBrtef ab^^veiittt. For practice : Go through, as in the above examples— /go-out (au^ge^en) every morning (ace. STOorgcn, m.). , He catches^p (etn^iolen) his brother. They introduce (uorjietten) their friend (jjreunb). 238. The simple separable prefixes are : — ab etn mit an empor na^ auf fort nteber au6 fier ob bei l^tn uor bar log ju [Exercise 44.] 239. ant^: is separable in some verbs, inseparable in others. In the separable compounds the simple tenses (i(^ tone — mtf, etc.) are rarely or never found.' According to rules already given the mift= has the chief accent in the separables, and the verb in the inseparables. Separable. mi^tiJlien, to sound wrong mif grf if en, to seize in the wrong place mi^arten, to degenerate mi^ieten, to underbid mif ge^en, to go astray mif j»anbeln, to do wrong (see other column) UltpfUngen, to sound wrong Insepabable. migfoKen, to displease mtfttngen, K ..^ mtf ratten, to fail (of crops, etc.) nti^tennen, to ie mistaken [ill p.-p. miffotten, etc. inf. ju miSfaUen, etc. golfc(; tonen, fdf<^ sceifen would be preferred. §240.] Meaning of the Separable Prefixes. 169 Sefakable. mi^lauten, to sound wrong mifletten, to mislead mipre^nen, to miscalculate mif fiimmen, to be inhai-momous p.-p.. mifgetont, mi^gegriffcn, etc. inf. mi?jut6nen, mt^jugreifcn, etc. Insepabable. mtfbittigen, to disapprove-of mi^bxau(^m, to misuse mi^traucit to distrust mi^beitten, to misinterpret mif gonnen, to grudge mi^Sanbetn, to ill treat p.-p. mtpittigt, or gcmiffiittig inf. ju migbittigen, etc. mi^be^agen, to suit iU mi^ittiihen, to displease mipttCtile^Ctl, to misunderstand p.-p. mi^te^agt, mi^lditU, mifBetjianbcn. Force and Meaning of the Separable Prefixes. I. Simple. 240. (I) 916=» (a) Literally, off, away : — abtegen, to put-off [a cloak, etc.) abjie^en to deduct. So also : o6fa5«n, to drive-off, start ; aixei\en, to start {on u, ioumey) ; abfeucm, tof/re-off. (6) hence, to take from; cf. English I w^l buy it off you. abfctttcn (dat. and ace), to beg-from ■ abfpretbtn, to acquit, i.e. to remove an accusation by ajudge's verdict (x\^in\\ to make a bargain with abieben, to com^ to an agreement i.e. to get from by bargaining, talking, etc. 170 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. More rarely, to copy : — abf^ireifcen, to copy in uniting abbtndtn, to copy in printing aiiiVotn, to copy after (c). A reversal = English uii-, dig- : — befleIlen=*o order; abbefieUen, to countermand abtaben, to unload abfarben, to diacolowr So also : oibedctl, to uncover; abrotjetl, to dissuade. {d) Completion. English out, to die out, burn out : — abbeten, to say-off, finish a, prayer obnufeen, i , , y to wear-olU abtragcn, J abwdgen, to weigh-out So also : abbtenen, to serve one's time ; abbtemietl, to bum out. {e) A gradual change. English off: — abfiibtcn, to cool-off abnebtnen, to decline {in health), to wane (of the moon). So also : obPerben, to die-off; abmogctn, to emaciate. (2) Sltts. (a) Drawing near, but often with very extended figurative signification, at, to : — anbieten, to offer-to anbeden, to bark-at onjeigen, to announce anfc^en, to looh-bt So also: (R{^) anjicbcn, to dress; fltlfponncn, to put-to [horses); anilaQtn, to accuse ; anreben, to address, accost. (6) Commencement : — anbret^en (ace), to break-off the first piece anflbnetben (ace), to cia the first piece (a loaf, etc.) So also: anfangen, to begin; anbrcnncn, to UglU {gas, etc.); anbaucn, to begin to cultivate or build. §240.] Meaning of the Separable Prefixes. 171 (3) »lttfs. (a) Literally and metaphorically, a moTement towards, or ^ position on, tJie upper surface oi. . . ; on, upon. auffre^altetl, to keep-on {a hat, etc.) auflaben, to load aufbleiien, to stay up auffl^ircibcn, to write-dmim (i.e. upon paper) So also: auffatteit (dat.), to itrike (the fancy); QM^ii^in, to put-on (a hat, etc.). (6) A movement upward and away from : — auffa^ren, to start up OUfjleJen, to get up (from bed, a chair, etc.) 80 also: aufge^Ctl, to rise (of the sun); au^fitiQiia, to ascend (iatr.); aufjte^en, to wind up (a vjcUch). (c) Keeping or preserving : — auf^eben, to keep, i.e. store up (apaper, present, etc.) So also : aufft)aren, to save up ; auff^ietien, to postpone. (d) Consuming, English up (of. ah-., d) :— aufbrau^cn, to use-up aufepn, to eat-up So also : auf^oren, to cease; auftdumett, to tidy-up. (e) Opening (cf. English to dup a door, i.e. do up, or open) : — aufmaH^m, to open (a door, box, etc.) aufteden, to raise the lid^ So also : anfbxti^tn to break-open ; auft^aueit, to thaw. 1 Cf . aSbttfm (afts, c), which means to take off the lid. 172 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. Xn. (4) 5!lU0s, (o) Movement from the interior of; literally and figuratively " out," " ex-" : — auSge^en, to go out augbe^nen, to extend au^jte^en to extract So also: audfe^en, to looh;^ audrufen, to exclaim: au^firctc^en to strike out, erase; auSttuitXi, to express. Hence, pyhUcUy: audta^en, to laugh at; augfpre(^en, to pronounce. (6) Completion of the action expressed by the simple verb : — au^bauen, to finish building auStrinf en, to finish-one's-glass auS^aUm, to hold-out to the end, to endure So also : auSbteniieil, to burn-out ; aUgloft^Cll, to extinguish ; aui3= fiilten, tofiU up; au^fragen, to interrogate. (5) ®Ct= appears to have two opposite meanings — (a) near or up to, (b) aside, away from ; both, however, originating in its meaning as a preposition, by the side of: but the latter in contradistinction to Hoti, in/ront of; hence, away from tlie front of, aside. \a) up to, near : — beifommcn (dat.), toget-at betfptingen (dat. ), to jump to the assistance of beific^cn (dat.), to assist betf(^{tef en (ace), to annex, enclose (in a letter) So also; bettVD^nen (dat.) to be-present-at ; itiixaQtn (ace), to contribute. (6) Aside : — bcilffjcn, to lay-aside, settle {a gtiarrel) So also : beifltrfen, to put away secretly bctfe^en to inter. ^ (Sr fie^t jung au3, lie holes young. § 240.] Meaning of the Separable Prefixes. 173 (6) S)ltt:/ the same as the adverb ba, there, which is merely a shortened form of bor j hence, be/o7-e, in the sight of, vidble to ; getting obsolete, and found in very few compounds : — baijietlen, to represent batbietcn, to offer So also : bar6ltngeil and batreic^cn, to present. (7) ®IH5, the form of in found in compound verbs, denoting almost exclusively movement into : ' — (a) Literally, a movement towards the interior of : — ein&tei^en, to break into (a house) einbtegen, to bend-in einpaden, to pack-up So also : (ft(^, dat.) etnbtlben, to imagine; ettljjctgcn, to get-in (to a carriage, etc.); (fl^) emfcjtffcn, to embark ; citlfc()reiben, to register (a letter) ; einjolett, to catch-up. (b) Hence, enclosure : — ttnfoffcn, to set (precious stones) einntauern, to enclose with a wall, immure So also : ettt^uttcn to veil^ wrap-up ; einf(^Ite?cn, to lock-in^ (c) In a few instances, destruction : — etnge^en, to perish (of plants, etc.) einbiifen, to forfeit So also : einfc^meljcn, to melt away. (8) ®VXpOX'i upward or aloft. Used principally in an elevated style : — tmporblfijeji to flourish emporPetgcn, to ascend (intr.), and with other verbs of motion. |t(5 smporarbcttcn, to work on^'s way up in the world. ^ Such forms as ctnftel^eii, einticgen (no movement) are of rare use. The proper forms are inneile^tn, tiiiicliegcn. But even these are not common. The usual expressions for / stand in, I lie in, etc., are \(ti (icfie (licpc) imrin, e.c. 174 The Parts of Speech. [Ohap. Xn. (9) i^I'^r English/or<%, amnard, away. In literal signification = tveg see this), (a) Literally: — fortgejen, to go away fortfc^icf en, to send away So also : fotteiletl, to hurry away ; fotttrctBeit, to drive away, and with other verbs of motion. (6) Continuance: — fottbaucrn (intr.), to last, continue [the noise continues) fottfa^ten (intr.), to continue, to go on doing (to continue to rain, etc.) foitfef en (trans.), to continue {a journey, etc.). So also : fottf4)ttltntnten, to swim away, to go on swimming ; foTt- f$rei(en, to go on writing. [Exercise 86.] (10) ^tV'f here, hither; direction towards the speaker. (o) Literally, here (i.e. hither) : — ^erlommen, to come-here ^etbringen, to bring-here So also : $erge(en, to give-up ; ^et^aben, to have-from. (6) Origin: — ^eifontmen, to eomt-from, originate (eifiammen, to he-descended-from So also : ^ertU^ien, to originate ; berne^men (ace), to takefrvm (c) To repeat by rote, mechanically : — beifagen, to say (from memory, a lesson, etc) berie^^nen, to count up So also : betbeten, to pray (from memory), (d) To the proper place : — (eriitbten, to set up (»iebet)5er|ietfen, to restore. §240.] Meaning of the Separable Prefixes. 175 (II) §ltt»; the opposite of Jjee, directioa from the speaker, ihiiher. (o) Literally, away from :-^ Jingcjen, to go-there iinfaitm, to drive-there, and with other verbs of motion. (6) Figuratively, loss or destruction, away: — ^intraumen, to dream-away Jitiflerbcn, to die-off 5tnti(I;teil, to execute {a criminal) So also : ^tnWctfcn, to fade away.^ Notice : ^iiu-ritfien (literally, to reach-there), to suffice ^intangen (or jutangen), to suffice S)ai xeidft ni($t $tn, that does not suffice. (i2) SoS'f ^mg^h loose, free from, detached from. Distinct in meaning from the adjective lofe, which means loose (i.e. not tight), (a) Literally and figuratively, a beginning, on, off: — to^lafTen, to let-go lOSge^cn, to go-off {of a gun), to begin (intr. fam.)^ loSfti^iefcn, to fire-off {ia,m. "to fire away," i.e. go-on) So also : tO^brennen, to set-off; tOSflfUern, to start {begin to steer). (6) Un-:— toSmadjin, to undo loSbinben, to take-off {a tie, etc.). (13) Witt'f like prep, with, together imth others : — ntttne^men, to tahe-with one; i(^ ne^ntc eg mit,' / tahe it with me. mitge^en, to go-with {one) ; mttfommen, to come-wilh {one) ; f Dtnnten ©ic ttltt ? are you coming with me {us) ? So also : mtfitngctt, to sing-with {others) ; mttfpieten, to play-with. mttt^etten, to communicate, inform, ^ Hence its elliptical use : tcr ©ommev ift 6in. (ScH. ) ®ttfe SBIumcn fint n'U ^in . . . are all faded or over. 2 jJBnS gcW lo« ? What is going on ? ^ The pronoun not expressed. 176 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. (14) 9lers, ogam. ttJieberfomntcn, to return Wteberbrtngcn, to bring back. Add to these TOieberJoIcn, to repeat, which is the only insepar- able verb compounded with MJtebet ; Witin^oU.-p.-p. VoitiiX' mt. (20) ^tt'f direction towards. {a) Literally : — > 5Ubttngen,^ to press-forward-to jufttcfen, to flow-to JUfluilevn, to whisper-to jutaufen, to run-to, and with other verbs of motion.^ So also : jurufcn, to call-to ; juf^neibcn, to cut-out {a coat, etc.). (6) Closing (cf. ouf, e) : — jumocjett, to'shut jubruden, to press-to, close {an eye, etc.) jubrtngen, to bring to a close, to spend {time) So also: jubleibcn, to remain shut; jufl^nittctl, to lace-up; JU» belommci), to get-to (i.e. shut). (c) Addition : — iune^men, to increase jufc^rciben, to ascribe jufcjcn, to look on. 241. In the examples we have given the. commonest meaning of the several verbs ; but many may be referred to different significations ; e.g. anfa^^en may be explained by «uf (6), {d), (e) : namely, (6) to rise, {d) to disappear, be consumed, (e) to open (intr.); bovf^ielen by Hot (6), (c), {d) : namely, (J) to prelude, (c) to play to others, {d) to play for imitation. [Exercises 87 and 88.] 1 The JU' of the infinitive comes in as usual after the prefix ju., iBjubvingen. '^ 'Followed by th» preposition auf with the accusative : — i^ ging ottf i^n jn, I went up to him; i^ tilt auf ten fSimm jugriaufcn, § 242.] Verbs compounded with Nouns. 179 Verbs compounded with Nouns and Adjectives. 242. These are treated exactly like other separable verbs. fe^If(^Iagcn, to migcarry (oj an undertaking); i0 fc^Iagt fejl, p.-p. fc^lgefc^togcn. frcifptec^en, to acquit glcic^fommen (dat.), to equal *^au3&alteil, to keep-home 9"f;""; Ito'bray gto^fpre^ien, ) HJO^dVOttcn (dat.), erlaufe au(S aug»erfouft Boraugbcjojlcn, to pay in advance i(^ it^aW i>oxai\$ wtanShtiaW Bortejolten, to reserve (a right) i(^ ii^alie wx wxht^altm [Exerdse 89.] 4. Prefixes Separable or Inseparable. 247. The prefixes ^vttitf, itbtV, UttUt, and um, and in a few instances l^htter and t»oJI, are often in the same com- pound, according to meaning, separable or inseparable. In some cases only one form exists. §§248-9.J Prefixes Separable or Inseparable. 183 248. When separable, as in all separable verbs, the prin- cipal accent falls on the prefix. When inseparable, the simple verb only is accented : jc^ burc^brin'ge tc^ brm'ge burdf)" t^ flberfe'^e tc!^ fe'ge u"6er. 249. Generally speaking, the separable form is intransitive and retains the primitive meaning of the' verb and prefix, whereas the inseparable form usually has a metaphorical signification, frequently becoming transitive, though from an intransitive verb. If it has a literal meaning, it denotes thoroughness, through and through, over and over, all rcnmd, all among. We have similar verbs in English, cf. to run out and to outrun, to stand under and to understand. Some examples of the commonest verbs of this class will best illns trate this statement.' [Exercise 45.] (a) '^uv^, Insbpakable. Separable. It has the general signification Through, literally, sometimes not of its English cognate through, metaphorically as in bureipfatfctl but rather of throughout, through {see below), and through, in all directions, cf. bur(^tCtfen, to travel all over. bur^eciften— btcSroau«bur(^6et?t imri^Bctfen — bie SKauS 6cigt bad Srct, the mouse bites the butc^ (in opposition to merely board right through. biting a piece off). burd^Mafen— berSrompcterburc^s but^BIafcn— cr Mfijl ba« Stitd bloft bic ®iait, plays all over tmi), he plays through the piece, the town. ' This list is perhaps some-what full, but we have aimed at giving the chief compounds in general use. It should not be attempted till the student is pretty far advanced. 184 The Parts of Speech. [Cfliap. xn. Inseparable. ixni^itei^tu — to perforate; ittt(^= kUTlf|bt!inflett> to penetrate, per- meate — ea bur^brang feinen ganjen Sotpei. burcjftt^wtt (fo5rcn=also to start) — bcr gcttenbc SRuf buri^fu^r metne ©lieber, the piercing cry went through, my very limbs. bUK^faDen (rare). bur^fKefleit— ber Sogelburi^fltcgt ben SBa(b...Jie« all about tlie wood. butc^ge^en, to walk all over, to examdne, scrutinize — cr bttC^gtng bfe ganje ©egenb, walked over the whole neighbourhood; n burtjgejt bit Strtcit feiner ®4)uteT, looks carefully over... turt^reifcn — ct burd;reift bie @egenb (French parcourir), bur($f4Iafett> to sleep all through — et bur(^f4)taft bie 9fo^t. Sefababi^. iuti^ix((^in—tt brt^t bur$, he breaks in two, breaks his way through. bur^bringcn— ic^ brtnge ben ©trirf nt^t burc^, / can't get the string through; er bitngt fetn Setntbgen bur(j^, rum through Ms fortune. buri^ brtnge n— baS fflaffei btang buri^... /ound its way through. bori^fojren— @t Jielt nitgenbS an, er f u^r bnrc^, lie stopped no- where, he drove through. Siwiijfotlen— 1$ fane bur$, 1 faa thro/ugh (a hole) ; / fail (in my examination). baHfltegen— i(^ lie^ eineOffnung unb ber 35oget ffog buri^. bunftgejen— bie 9Jabel gejt ntt^t Wxi)... won't go through; ein @efe^ gejt buri^, o law passes; ein ^fcrb gejt bur$, runs away; er ge^t feine ©ojlen buri^, wears through his soles. btttri^prSgeln, to thrash — er pi3g» elt bie Snaben bur^.* buri^rcifen— er reifte burc^, tra- velled right through (cf. buri$: ffl^fcn). ' Apparently exceptional. One would expect tuv^pvugett. 1249.] Prefixes Separable or Inseparable. 185 Inseparable. bur^fe^en— cr burc^ftc^t bic 'JJapicrc, looks through the docu- ments. burc^ftwii^cn— i(^ biir^fireic^c bie Ocgcnb, scour the country. b It t (^ iie^en, to march all ovei — bet geinb bur(^jie^t tai 8anb. ©cr gaben bur^jog ben gonjen SaU, the thread passed through the ball in all directions. Sepabable. butiij f c:^ c It— bie Sffnung war ni^t gons berf(^toiTen {closed up), man fa^ buti^, saw through. burrftjltet^en — i^ ^oie btcfc 3eilen bitr(^gcpri(|cn, / have struck out those lines. burdjjicjen— er jtc^t bic 9lobe! bur^, pulls the needle through; baS Sonb war offen unb man jog bie 3;ruppen;bur(^...'maj-c/ted the troops through. (b) tiftet. It .conveys the idea of thorough- ness, all over, in all directions : (a) excess, as: iiberlaben, to overload (b) handing over, as : ittcr^ reic^en, to deliver and various figurative significa- tions. Cf . the preposition over. flbcrSieten— er ubcrbot miii^, he bid higher. Uberfa^reii/ to drive (etc.) all over (cf..bur^fa^ren)— cr iibcrWr btn ®CC/ sailed (rowed) all over the lake; fie iiberfu^rfn ben $unb, drove over the dog. flberfii^ren, to convict. ^berfiiUen, to overfill. Soalsoiibertoben, uber^eijen, etc. iibereefien (einen Sricf), to deliver a letter, to deliver over (a person). Across, almost always. U6ei;bieten— tc^ bot 10 9»arf unb er bot 2 STOarf iibcr. iifterfajren— wtrMiebenbieSfeita beg gtuffeg, ite aber fu^ren iiber.* itftesfu^ren, to lead over.* iiftregeben (rare). * fee § 250. 186 The Parts of Speech, [Chap. Xn iNSEPABABtE. U6cr«e^e»— i$ flbcrgc^e ben getter, / overlook the fauU; t^ fiberge^e \>aS ©tjretben, / look over the writing. ubetbiittfen/ to load, pile up — 3?' monb mit SSobtt^aten iiber= ^aufen, to load with favours. Uber^oten (o) to hear {a lesson, etc.), and, strange to say, (6) to fail to hear. Ubetlaffen, to leave to' — i^ uber= taffe S^ncn bit ?!flege mcineg SinbcS, / leave to you the charge of my chUd. Uberlaufets, to pass over — tin ©(^fluber iibetlauft mic^, a shudder runs through me. Uberleben, to survive. Uberlegen, to reflect— id) Jobc btc ®a^e flberiegt, thought over (lie matter. Ub erliefent, to deliver over, liand down (to posterity). Ub eina(9ieii/ to pass fAe night Uberne^men, to take over, under- take— ii) iibetne^mebte gubtitng beS ®ef$oft^, the conduct of the business; Setttnnb ubeinebmcn, to 08% too much of one; also : to overcharge [purchasers), to over- work (horses); ^i) iibctne^nten, to overdo it (in eating, working, etc.). Sepaeable. uftetgeben— i$ gcbe fiber,* / go across (of. fibetfobten) ; bte giflfitgfeit gcbt fiber, the liquid runs over; er gejt jum gcinbt fiber, goes over to the enemy. itSerloufen— ba« gag tauft fiber, the cask runs over. itfiertcgcn— ti$ lege cS uber,*/fay it over (e.g. a doth over i To leave by wUl is ^intetlaffcn. * See § 250. S249.] Prefixes Separable or Inseparable. 187 Inseparabee. iXittvaji^en, to surprise. Ubeiteben, to talk over, persuade. iXiitveiUftn, to hand over, deliver {a letter, packet, etc.). V,i«ti<^Xafeu, to oversleep (o time) — t$ iifcerfcplafe i^tt, / sleep longer than he; iij flbcrf^tofc mtC^, oversleep myself. nberf^ceiten, to overstep, cross (a boundary). Uberfd^ttiemmen, to flood. Uberfe^en, to look beyond — id} iiberfeje btc ganje ©egenb, f overlook the whole country ; tt flbcrite^t feine Section, he looks through Ms lesson. Ubcrfcijen, to translate (a book,- etc.). Ubertreffen, to surpass. Itberttei^en, to exaggerate. Sepabable. ubettveten, to fibcrtrcte tai @ebot (the corn- mamdment); i$ iibcrtrcte mt$, / sprain my ankle. Ubertniegen, to outweigh. Ubertnintien, to overcome (a diffi- culty, etc.). Ub CTjeugen, to convince. UftetJfc^rettcn, /sU iiaettoinbefi tit$ felbfi unb Ultd; bu iiiet^t^^ [get over); id) nfeerlefee bi(^ unb mi(^ felbfi. {G.—Egmont.) [Exercise 90.] (e) Urn. Extension all round, encircling : (a) Eonnd : t($ laufe unt, I run urngtaietl, to surround with u round. ditch. (6) Change: i0 btlbe Ultt, / transform ; i^ tobe UlJt, change the load. (c) Upset : i($ blafc ura, / blow over ; iij ttppe um, / tip over. Umonneti, to ernbrace. UnKonett, to build ail round. Vlm^aVLtn, to rebuild. Untgeben, to surround. ttmgei^eii— 1$ umge^e, / avoid (e.g. u person's lumse), I evade (a law), ie. go aJmut aU round, but do not toucJi it. Umbinben— i(^ binbe metne®ro« batte um, I put on my tie. Umbrtngen, to put to death. Umbre^cn— t(t( breje mtc^ um, / turn round. Hmfa^ren— {(J fojre um, / turn round; also: I upset. itmfoJlen— i(^ faHe um, / /aH d^ieje um, Iclmnge house;' to examine,'^ search (a box, etc.), 'm>W an inquiry. Untertnetfen, to subdue {a pro- VlntetWttUn, to throw under.* vince, etc.); ft^* utiterwerfen, to Unterjeiil^neit, same as untei^ fi^reiben. (e) »oa. Completion : — Literal : full : — DoUbrinsen, etc. (§ 232, 8). Uottgief en,.ir ftnb „ {i^v fcib) I ®ie finb /" fte Itttb „ Pluperfect. t(^ twot gegangen, I had gone bu toat^ „ etc. Future. i^ wcrbe gei^en bu wtrfl „ etc. Future Perfect. i^ wcrbe gegangen feitt, I shall have gone bu wirji gegongen fcttt, etc. Imperfect. t^ gingc bu gingefi, etc. Perfect. \6) f ct gegangen, / haue gone bttfcift „ er fci wtr fei(c)tt „ t^tfci(c)4 \ Bit fei(c)tt/" fte fci(c)n „ Pluperfea. \6i toficc gegangen, /Aarfjro«« bu toiiteft „ etc. Future. i($ werbe ge^en bu weibeji „ etc. Future Perfect. iH) werbe gegangen fciti, / Bkall haue gone bu werbefi gegangen fchi, etc. S 252.] Neuter Verbs of Motion. 193 Present. t'^ wurbe gepen bit witvbejl gefien, etc. Shorter Form. (Same as Imperfect Subjunctive.) t(^ gtnge, etc. Conditional, Past. ic^ witrbe gegangen fcin, I should have gone bu ttjurbefl gegongen feitt, etc. Shorter Form. (Same as Pluperfect Subjunctive ) tc^ ttta« gegangen, etc. Impeeative. gei»e (bu) ge^t (t^r) gepen ®te } • Infinitive. Pres. (ju) gepen P&rf. gegangen (ju) fetn, to Pabticiplbs. Pres. ge{»enb Per/, gegangen 252. Use of ^aBen and fetn as the auxiliaries of verbs in the active voice. There being some difficulty in deciding what verbs, or classes of verba, are conjugated with ^(tbett, and what with feitt, we give the following rules : — ^abett is the auxiliary — (a) Of all transitive and reflexive verbs : 2)er ®axtmx ^ai bte 25Iumen kgoffen. The gwrdener has watered the flowers. Die ^tnber ^attett jt^ gefreut. The children had rejoiced. N 194 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. xn. (6) Of verbs which govern the genitive or dative : Except : begegnen (dat.), to meet. fotgcn (dat.), to follow. XOtx^tn (dat.), to yield (which take fcin). 3cl) \i«ibt i^m ge^orc^t, / have obeyed him. but: ic^ 6itt 3^nen a,i'{s)iit, I have followed you. (c) All true impersonal verbs : eg l^ai geregnet, e^ i^attc mtr getraumt Except : gef^el^en, to happen " ^ ' \ to succeed glucfen, ) gcrat^en, to thrive ; also : to get {into a place, state, etc.) ; and their opposites : '"!fj!?!"' XtofaU; which all take fciw. ee ij5t mtr getungen, / have succeeded. VDOg tft gef^e^en? what has happened? eg wttb ung mifgtudEt fein, we must have failed. (d) Of all intransitive verbs denoting a state (not change of state), action (not a movement to) or feeling, e.g. fc^tafeit, to sleep; fptetett, to play ; at^men, to breathe. ^aft bit getttten unb gejiatnmert? (Fr.) Have you suffered and grieved ? ' But not the compounds 6efotgen and utrfolgen, which are transitive. §§ 253, 254.] Neuter Verbs of Motion. 195 253. Sctn. The perfect participle after feitl partakes of the nature of an adjective ; this auxiliary must therefore be used when the participle is to have adjectival force, and express a state, not always existing, but one which is the result of an action that has recently taken place. The Germans say : er tfi gevetft, geftorfcen, he has travelled, died, which are equi- valent to : er tji al&ft)efenb {absent), tObt {dead), implying that an action has taken place (in this case the action of travel- ling, dying), and that he is in a certain state in which that action has placed him.i Hence feitt is the auxiliary of verbs ' denoting : — A change of position or of state — i^ 6in gegangen, gereift, eingefd^tafen, gencfen, I haue gone, travelled, fallen asleep, recovered. ia) bin gegangen, i.e. lam there, the result of having gone there. t'C^ bin eingefd^fafen, i.e. I am asleep, the result of having fallen asleep. t^ bin genefen, i.e. I am well, the result of having re- covered. 254. The same verb may consequently have either aux- iliary : f^ahin, when one's thoughts are directed to the action, merely as an action; fcilt/ when the purpose or result of the action is kept in view, or when the place to which or from which the subject goes is actually mentioned or implied. ' We have traces of this usage in English, and say : / am gone, he is airived, "Out of the camp of Israel am I escaped " (2 Sam. i. 3). 196 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XII. ^ahen answers the questions: where? (not where to?) when ? how long ? how ? Itrauen ©ie jt(|) Present Indicative. tc^ traue nrir, / trmt mi/self bu traufi btr er (jte, el) traut |t^ wit traueti uni (ipr traut eu^)-| ©fe trauen jtd^J fte trauen ft(^ tc^ ^abe mtr gctraut, id^ werbe intr trauen, etc. In the same way (accusative): — ft(^ 6eftnben, to be {m health, etc., see below) ; (td^ ertnnem, to r&nrnriher ; ft(^ Pe^elfen, to make shift; fic^ Wuubem, to wander. (Dative) : — jt(^ f^ntett^eln, to flatter onesdf ; fic^ sorwerfen, to reproach oneself ; jti^ etnbtlben, to imagine. 258. "Middle'' Voice. — There is in Germaji a, use of the reflexive verb to denote an action not performed by the subject, but by some person or thing nnmentioned or unmentionable, in which however the subject is chiefly concerned. Examples : — X)tx SBtnb Us* ft4- The wind abates. ©iefc ©ticfcl ttogen fi^ gut. TTiese boots wear well. S)aS SSSetter Bnitect fii^. TJie weather changes. Sic gloten fttmmen pi^ nai!^ bent Son bc3 ©tude^. (W.) Thefivtes are tuned to the tone of the piece. Stef^teiBt n*ba«? How is tluit spelt ? §§ 259, 260.] Reflexive Verbs. 199 259. There is a similar impersonal use of the reflexive verb to denote an action in very general terms. (Cf. IftfTcn, § 400 d.) es tauit fti^ girt in biefem ©aate. This room is good for dancing. ®8 fr^reist fiift f^Icc^t auf biefem papier. This paper is lad for writing on. @8 \iiit fi^ feequcm in meinem iBiViW- 260. Some verbs reflexive in German but not so in English :- ftc^ argcrn (iiber, aoc), to he an- noyed fiic^ auf^atten, to stay (in a place) ftc^ bebanfen, to return thanks (tc^ teeiten, to mahe haste Tlil)ie^\Mn, to be,feel{"se porter") jl^ 6e^elfen, to mahe shift itcj) beftogen, to complain it(^ befiimmern, to mind, heed itl| betaufen (ouf, aoo.), to amount {to) it0 bcmii^cn, to endeavour (t$ betrogen, to behave fi(^ bcitnnen, to recollect ii(|) bci»etbcn(nnt), to apply for Iti^ bficfen, to stoop (ic^ etcigncn, to happen ftC^ Ctinnern (gen.), to remember ji$ cnt^atfen, to refrain f[(^ cntfc^Iicgen, to resolve fi(i() erbarmcn, to have mercy (t^ er'^Olen, to get better, "pick up " ft4) eifalten, to catch cold fief) crlfl^ncn, to make bold ft($ Crfunbtgen, to inquire ft(^ fteucn (iiber, ace), to rejoice {at) it(j^ fiir^ten (»or, dat.), to be afraid (of) fic^ ^iiten, to beware ftt^ irren, to be mistaken- it(^ na^crn, to approach fi^ ra(I;en, ti f ommt borauf an (ob), it depends upon . . . {wlietJier). te ^angt babon ob (ob), „ „ tS geft^ie^t SJnen xt(fyt, it serves you right. eS tmltt, the bell rings. ti (baS) BCtfleJt ftlj »on felbjl, it {that) is a matter of course, ("cela va sans dire"). For the impersonal use of the passive see §§ 214, 215. 273 Many intransitive verbs can be used impersonally to express an action in a very general manner : ©8 inatt urn feinen STOunb. (P. Hetse.) Tliere was a twitching about his mouth. Ditmal fltnfl ed mit ijt m(^ bem Sobeorte. (Richter.) This time {there was a going with her) she was taken to the watering-place. [Exercise 92.] 274, 275.} The Adverb. 205 Chapter XIII. The Adverb. 274. Any German adjective or participle in its simple form can, if its meaning permits, be used as an adverb : Sr f(^rei6t gut. He' Ste @^uler axHxttn fteif^tg. The pupils work diligently. Sin ungemetn grcgeg 2luffepen. An unusually great fuss. Set Sutfc^er muf ^^neUev fal>ren. The coachman must drive faster. 15u f)3rtd^|i etn grofeS SSort gelaffen aug, (G.) Piw MWer calml%. a great saying. 275. A few common adverbs are formed from nouns and adjectives by suflSxing stDetfe (English -mse, likewise) : QXMU(^ixn)ii\e, fortvmately ; t^eilwd^e, partly ; rucfroetfe; by jerks; pfuntWeife, by the pownd; fc^rittwetfe, by steps. 206 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XIII. Oomparison. 276. Few adverbs, except such as are also adjectives, can be compared regularly: oft, ofter, am ofteflett. Most of them, if their signification is capable of comparison, take me^r, am metfkn, or wetter, am wetteften : wetter o6en, further up; am metfien fettwcirt^, most to the side. 2!T7. The following are compared irregularly : am befien am Itebjien am e^ejien \ am friil^elien/ am metjien am njcntgfien •> om mtnbejien / @ern and Iteb are thus used : tc^ ^abt gem, / ^ife— (better than tc^ tte6e). t'^ l^abe baS Canbleben gcrn, / like living in the covmtry. td|» ^abe bfe @tabt tteber, I prefer the tovm. tc^ tefe gerti, I like reading. tc^ effe gent, / like (to eat). id) ep gem gletfd^, / like meat. t^ ejfe tteber gtfd^, I prefer fish. tai tfi mtr Iteb, / am glad of that. tai tji mtr Iteber, I prefer that. ba^ tji mtr Iteb JU ^orett, / am glad to hear that. 3Bo|)t, well, is used of the health, "or in compounds, as the adverb to gttt, e.g. WJJ^tgeborett, of good family. But : er fprtc^t gut S)eutfc^, he speaks German well. 2)u malft (jpaint) fe^r flut. tt)0{)t well beffer gerit (tteb) VjUlingly tteber batb soon frfii^erJ otel much mepr wentg little wentger"! mi'nber . §§278-280.] The Adverb. 207 278. There is an adverbial superlative expressed by the termination 'tni (a hybrid form of the adverbial genitive), e.g. : — bcjlcnS, in the best manner possible : i^ bflttfe bcftctl^, my best thanks. bo^fienS, at most : Joc^ften^ JWet Safle, two days at the most. minbcjieng, i , , , . n / r"^ least. fpatejlenS, a< the latest. Cf. also : nic^t im geringjien, not in the least. Note further the superlative forms : auf'S beflc, auf S fc^Onfle, OUfel fteunbJi($(ie, etc. cr ^at feine %xheit auf S befie »ottcnbet, he has finished his worh in the best possible manner. 279. The simple form of the superlative is frequently used ad- verbially as a superlative absolute : — i)Oi)% greatly au^er)}, enAremely ergebenft, most humbly ' gcjctfamfl, most obediently Cin ^oe^fl intcreffantc^ S5UC^, a m^st interesting booh. bag ttai^fl liegenbe @Ut, the neighboring estate. 280. Adverbs of Time.^ \an% formerly, "I used" : n War fonj} fc^t freunbti^, he used to be very hind, fcii^ec, synonymous with fonfl. e^er, sooner, rather : iHj tBttt ejcr jjcrbcn, I vnll sooner die. ein tnal, once (past). " gs Wax cinmat cin.Sonig," einft, one day (future). ®u wtrlt ctnjl ijergeffen. neulidj), i^e oi^er (2a^. iiivjlii!^, recently. tliii^ftenS, shortly. lange, a long time. unlangft, not long ago. iltid), presently. fogleii^, immedmtely. baVo — 6alii, now — now, sometimes — sometimes. ' " Yours truly," at the end of a letter. ' We only give those adverbs which present any difficulty or dififer iu use from the English, 208 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. xm. Advebbs of Time — Corainued. e«ft, mly, not till. Sr wtrt erjl morgcti fommcn, he will not come till to-morrow. noi^, still, no^ nii^i, not yet. noS) nU{malS), never yet. cbeu etft, only jvst. 6i8 ittft, as yet. ttttf lmntcr,/or ewer. f i^o«, already, sometimes, ever -. ©inb ©te f(|On (or jcmald) in SRont geWefcn '? Have you ever been to Borne ? naii unb noi^, gradually. faft nie, hardly ever. Saitn nni wonn, now and then. 281. l^etttC anovgen, this morning, ^cutc frft^, (earfj^) this mffrning. ^ttttt 9tl6enb, ^A«s evening, to-night, ^eutt yiaiS)t, tonight. biefe 91a^t, te< mi^A^ (only just past) ; otherwise :— geftetrn 9i:6enb, Zas< wigrAi, yesterday evening. geftevn fjlitl^ (or geftectt SWorgen), yesterday morning. fforgefiectt, m ^(Xttfe, or 1»tvtti% away from home. tiOt:n, in front; ffiwttn, behind. nt^tntm, next door ; gegettuBer, opposite. icgenbtVO {rest), itgenbtOOl^tn {motion), somewhere. nttgenb3 {rest), nitgenbS l^in {motion) nowhere. nbetaU {rest), ubttaSi l^in {motion), everywhere. anietSUto (rest), anbetSitiol^in {motion),^ somewhere else. rccf)t§, fo i!Ae right; little, fo <7ie Ze/i)ii|l antici'ewo^in ge^cn miifeit, you will have to go elsewhere. i 284-285.] The Adverb. 211 284. Adverbs of Degree. feljr, very, (with a verb) very much; t$ bonfe S^nen fc^t. giemU(§, pretty, tiici, wmc/j, /acy »tel Heiner,/(M- smaller. etloai, somewhat, rather j e.g. ctttJaS longer. nai:^ tinmal fo, as— again; nO(^ etnmot fo 0»g. fanft nii^tS> nothing else. gleii^f am, as it were. int HUgtmeintn, in general. iibecl^att))!, ira a word, in general, altogether.^ Ittuiev, merely, nothing iut. ©g finb fnater SMief^linge. (G.) TAc^ aui^/ also, translates elliptical clauses like so did I, so was he, etc. ic^ au4), tx au$, etc A. 3c$ fcnne ben SEBeg fe^r gut. B. 3cSi au^, «o <2o /. S)er ^ert aut^, «o c2oes this gentleman. 285. Adverbs of AflBrination, Negation, Doubt, etc. fteilt*. \ getni^, \ certainly, without doubt. iebcnfttUS, / daresay, no doubt, ©ie (tnb iebenfoUS Mt mubc, / daresay you are very tired. toaf)t^il)einlii^, most likely. jtoot, indeed, it is true, ^wax tft iaS aESeftcr trufce {dull), boc& . . . naiiitlir^/ of course, naturally. 1 Uier^^autJt is one of the hardest adverbs to find English equivalents for, or to use correctly. It may be said to generalise or summarise, and is the opposite of "individually" or "in particular." S>iit i(i iibet' (au4>t eine uon ten gvof ten Untcrnc]|mungm . . . , where, after mentioning several individual excellencies of the undertaking, you sum them up by saying it is " one of the greatest." 3^ Mn Ubetifaupt fe^r cnHJiirt iiSrc fein SBenc^mcn In a word, I am very disgusted at his conduct. {I have parti- cularised his faults, and now sum tliem up by expressing my disgust at them.) 212 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. Xm. Adverbs of AFFiEMATioir, etc. — Contimied. snffintfl, by chance, "I happen to" ; ii) Wax jufcitttg im 8ot)Cn, / happened to he in the. shop. umfcnft, 1 ftetseSettS, (■^'"■'^*'^"^''"'^'"- tm @egettt^eil, on the contrary. Soffentliiij, u is to he hoped: fte fttil) Joffcntlic^ ouSgcgongctt, ft is to he hoped that they have gone out. niS)t, not ; gac nid^t, not at all. (gat fetn, no — whatever.) f a^ gat tti^t, ha/rdly ai all. 3(^ ^tn fafi gar nil^t Itiube, hardly at all tired. an^ niStt, not dther : tl^ aut^ mi)l, nor 1 0,ther : bie ©cjaufpirier au(| ni$t, mor «^ actors either. SESeiiti eS tegnet ou$ ni^t. noi^ lange nir^t, Tiof TiearZ^. feineStoegS, = . , . , ^-1 no means. unmogIi(f|, not possibly. ^6) fann S^nen ttttmoglii^ ^etfen, I can- not possibly help you. 286. Interrogative. foann? wAem? ttJO? ■where? {rest.) iWOl^m? whereto? ttio^ei:? where from? niHft \»afyt^ "n'est-ce pas?" do Irwt? are we not? can't you? etc. @ie wevben mirtommen, ni^t wa^r ? — jwm'^ yow? [Exerdses 48 awe^ 3JotWaitfe6, not far from the tovm hall. Scr 5Karf^oIt wotttc it(|> ISnaa iier Sufte no^) ^a\a\i jutfid-- giejen. (ScH.) TAe Marshal was-about to retire along the coast to C. Sines Se6(et« tvegen, entfagtman feinem 3Kanne. (L.) On account ofafavM one does not renounce a man. asenen i>eg fttottifij^eu 2;oncg $a6e ic^ nt($t3(tt. (L.) / 7ia«e no time (to trouble) about the derisive tone. 3(^ !omme tueBen bcr SRc^nung, / Aa»e come about the bill. 289. B. With the Dative. fluS, OM^o/ init, with fett, since tet, at, near nacj), to, a/fer Son, o/, /row* gegenuter, opposite (oV <«'«'') X"? *" Contracted with the article as follows : — betm, for 6ei bent »oni, for »on t»em pm, for p bent jur, for p Dev Farther :— binnen, within entgegen, towards gcmfif, according to juno^ifl, ,}■ ' , } together with ■ fatnmt, ) jufolge, according to. 1 Ot unferm ■6au|)te. (Zeplitz. ) Over oar head. §289.] The Prepositions. 215 (i) 9til§ (a) movement from the inside of, out of, f.vm, att§ bem Socl;e (hole); tin ilaufmanu au^ Sonbon, a merchant from L. (6) material or component parts : ein ©C^ranf miS SMa^agOtlt, a cup- hoard of mahogany ; eg bcjle^t au§ ge^ltl Ullb SBoffer, it consists of clay and water: (c) the motive of an action : « t^flt ii o«8 9Jeu|)itrtC, /le &'rf ii yrom curiosity. (2) 3Sei (as) proximity, near : Bet ber 33vH(fe {bridge), ^ittnig 6et Sresben, bte 6ct)tacl;t 6ei @eban, e, in Goethe('s writings). (c) of time, contemporaneous, on, during, etc. ; 6ci SRa^t, hy night ; 6ci feinev Slnfunft, o» Sis arrival ; 6clin ©piri, at play. (d) in special phrases, oaths, etc. ; 6ei bcr ?)anl) nc|ntcn, ftel mctnct ®)Xi, hy my honour, (3) ©egcniiBer, wer against, opposite, precedes or follows the noun : ev wejnt ber ^t'rc^e gegenuBec. (4) Wlxi (a) company or agreement, with : tx retji init fetner '^i^te, tommt mit fetner gtinte, fr^eZs mte Don, feM of. (e) agent after the passive, hj : er HJt'rb tJOtt fetnen Ce|)rern getofet, Ae is praised by his masters ; Horn 9it(^tev »erur* t^Cttt, sentenced h'l) the judge. {/) for convenience' sake, instead of the gen. (§ .365) : tie ©traf Ctl Son ''JJarig, bet Saifcr son iDjierretC^, tte emperor of Austria. (8) 3*t (*) movement to, generally to persons (cf. nac^) : JU mir, to my house; ^tt ntetnem 33etter, to my cousin's; rarely of places : jut ^t'rc^e (or nac^ t>er), to if gatlJC ®tgcnt>, throughout the whole neighbourliood ; bad gc^t Hlft butoffnung, against all hope ; ttitbet fetr SDSunf^e {wishes), ber getnb rudt gegen or tvibet: bi ©tobt SDOr, tif«I/ heyond all dovbt ; fonbev ®let$en leyond com- pare. (6) Um, (a) movement or situation, round: Uttl tie ©tobt ge^en, um ben S£tfc^ ftgen. (6) loss or forfeiture ; (t !cmmt um fein Sc6en, lie loses his life ; C6 iji um ijn gef(|e$cn, «* is all over with him. (c) exchange, /oj-: Sopf um Sopf, head for head; um (cinen ^Vel«, ' at no price; um SlKcg in bet 2i8ctt,/or flsZZ i§ anff up-to and on; btS in, wp-to and in, etc.) : BiS auf bag 25a^ {roof); Big tn bag SOBaffer; BiS jur 33rficEe; 6i§ SreSben, as far as JX; 6i8 ba^in, thus far; IttS btefen Slbenb, ««<«? intet'g for ftinter bag) 292. (a) They govern the dalive to express a remaining in a place, not necessarily actual repose : 3(^ jie^e in bcm aSJaff cr. / stand in the water. & |t§t neficn nttr. Re is sitting beside me. (ix fpringt in bcm aSrtffct. He jwrvps {about) in the water. (b) They govern the accusative to denote ejection towwrds : 3c^ fpringe in buS aSaffct*. I jump into the water. §292.] The Prepositions. 223 He sits down beside me. 3^ ge|)e auf bet S:erraffc. / walh (about) on the terrace. 3^ ge^e auf bie SEerraffe. I go (walk) on to the terrace. ^^ txeibe bag aBtIb uor mit ^tt. I drive the game along before me (the game remains in the same position with regard to me). 3(^ trette tai 2BtIb tfot ba§ ®c6oubc. J drive the game to a position in front of the buildings. 25ie 2lug|t(^t auf bew Serge. The view on the hill. Ste 3lugjtd|)t ouf t>a9 X^aL The view on to the valley. strengthened by 6i8: bag 'S&a^%x ftt'cg 6i8 on bl'e SErep^je. (/) of time, with 6i§ : t^ sevfd^ob eS 6i§ an ben fol* genben S^ag, I postponed it till . . . (g) an approximate number : SBte lotige Jo6t tjr ))rOCCffirt? Oln bie ai)t So^re. (G. ) .Hbto hng have you been at law ? About eight yea/rs. ' But im Sommet, oc(»jett ge^en, to go to a wedding. (e) with 6i8, -degree, etc., up to : US anf'S Sufer^e, to the ■utmost; 6t8 Bttf ben ^OC^IiCtl ®ipfcl, to tJie highest top. For big ouf, except, see Sig, § 290, J, Note. (/) of future time, for, till: t'^ Derreife Ottf 2 2;age, 7 am going-away-frorrirhome for 2 V 8 U^V, before 8 o'clock; ein aStertet t)ov 12 U|)r, I to 12; tmv 9 3a^ren, 9 ^«ars ago. 232 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XIV. {d) it comes before the object of some word denoting/ear, avoid- ance, horror, etc., the idea being in presence of: bo8 ^inb fur#tet ^i) bur bem $unbe, ... is afraid of the dog (i.e. shows fear in presence of the dog); 3(bf(^eu ftot bcm 35c= tragen, abhorrence of the behaviour. Also before words implying protection, the idea being tu stand before and ward off: i^ Deibaig i^n bar bet 9$ei- fotguitg, /concealed him from pursuit; Jiiten ©ie ft(^ »or bcm Si^japfen, beware of the icicle. (e) it comes before a word denoting the cause of an action, state, or feeling, with, from : n ft^rie Vox @^metien, cried with pain: Wax aufei ftl^ i>or i^renbe, vms beside himself with joy. With the accusative ; (/) literally, Tnovement before : i^ fc^tebe ben ©tupl t»or ta€ geujier ; ^)flange 23dume t>ot tai ^an€ ; et f4>I«9 mtc^ Uor ba^ ©eftc^t, . . .on the frmt of the face. (lo) 3^'f^^ denotes position or movement between two objects : — Wiih the dative : (a) literally, position between : er fog Jttif^ett ben beiben @^tt)ej}ern, he sat between the two sisters. (b) mutual relation: etn ©trett {quarrel) jtvif^en mir unb metnem 9Zeffen ; etn Unterf^ieb jtvif ^en ben jtt»ei ®lafern._ (c) of time, between : jftiifd^en 4 unb 5 U^r. With the accusative : (d) literally, movement between : er legte |t^ (lay down) jttiifd^en nji(^ unb nieinen Svubev; tc^ fege ben SBlunicntppf (Jlower-pot) jtvifiljen bic beiben genfter. 1 295, 296.] The Prepositions. 233 295. Many prepositions can take an adverb or another preposition after the noun to strengthen the idea; cf. English "from this day Mth":— son ©riltib au8 from tlie foundations, thoroughly. son Jeutc on from to-day. »on ^aufe a«8 from (his) birth. yon SuflCtlb ««f from {his) youth. »0n filters Set from the olden times. And this may take the form of the prefix of a separable verb, e.ff.: — er ge$t Winter feinem ^nxn ^et. He goes along behind his master. 6r tfettcrt untcr ben SoumHantmen x>uvi^. He climbs through under the logs. The adverb oiouf is ungefSfr — unsefd^c 2 Stunbcn. § 296.] The Prepositions, 235 most, ^0(^f}en8; at night, i« ber SRfli^t; at noon, ju 3»{ttag; at peace, im gtieben ; at play, 6eim ©ptd; a« the post, o«f ber f Ofl; at any price, ju jebem ^rcife; at random, ttuf'8 ®erotjett)0^1 ; at my request, «nf metne Stttej o« «cAooZ, in bcr Bi^nlt; at sea, jnr ov alien Siiigcn; 6e/ore 6 o'clock, bot 6 UJr; before the throne, tior bent S^rone (ben %^ton). Behind. Behind the cupboard, JJntet bcm ©(i^ranfe (ben ©t^ronf); (oion?)— ie«»d=5inte«— 5e«, et lief Winter un8 \)tx. Below. Below the bed, untee bem S3ette ; below the bridge (i.e. further down stream), UQtev^alb bet StiJrfe. Beneath, Beneath one's notice, untet oHei ^tittl. Beside. Beside me, ne*en mit {m\(fy); beside myself {with joy, etc.), au^ec tttit. Besides. Besides his suite, ouftee feinent ©efolge. Between. Between the leaves, jtoif^en ben Slattetn (bie SBliittei); between the door and the window, jtolfi^ien bet (bie) SJiiie unb bem {iai) genfier ; between ourselves, unttv unS gefagt or unter »iet Slugen. Beyond. Beyond the sea, ienf eit beS TtttXiS ', or iibet, beyond the frontier, u6et bet (bie) ©tenjc; beyond all description, fiftet flUe S8efd;teibung 5 to beyond the camp, biS aSei; iai Saget ftinnna (Hoffmann); bei/ond measure, fi6e« bie (or aHe) 5Wapen. 236 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XTV. By. Agent after the passive = ban, he was killed by his servant, er iDurbe tion fetnem Stener getijbtet ; a poem, by Schiller, ein ®cbi(^t tion @C$.; agent or means {not generally after the passiye)= bitci^, / sent a letter by a servant, buti^ etltcn ®icnet.^ By my advice, nui^ tneiliem fRat^e; .by the arsenal, hti (neben) beiM 3eug$aud; by birth, Hon ®eburt; by booh-post, uttUv Sreuj' banb; bythebye,bafaUtmheientitt', by candle-light, 1)tiiii}tt; by chance, jufatttg (adv.); by 6 o'clock, 6i8 6 U^f, by day, iti Sag ; day by day, Sog f lit Sag ; by dint of, betmitielfl (prep, with gen.), by far, 6ei weitem ; 10 ft. by 6 ft., 10 guf tang Utlb 6 guf breit; by force, huti^ Ocltialt; by {via) Hamburg, uSer ^.; by help of, mit fiulfe; taller by a head, um eilien Sopf grower; by heart, OM^Ilienbtg (adv.); by the lunir together, jn ganjen ©tunbcn; by jerks, tudweife; by land, jn ?arb; liule by little, ro$ unb na(^', by wluU means? inxii m\i)tt SIRtttdV; by all means, aKerbtng^; by no means, fetneSiVegd; by mistake, ttttS SSetfe^en; by myself, odetn; to call by name, Seim Siamen nennen; to know by name, bent 9?amen nor^ fennen; one by one, etnjeln, or einer na$ bent onbern; by order, anf Sefejl; by post, mit bet ?o(i; by the pound, pfunbweife; by ship, gn ©^lifftj ^ my side, ntitn mir (mi$) ; side by side, ncben einanbei; by sight, Bon 2lnfe^en; a»< of, ani SOiangel an (dat.). [Exercise 97.] from. ilfr. ^. is from (i.e. a nafeVe or resident of) Berlin, f)etr 31. ijj auS Settin; /rom experience, au9 grfajtung; Ae comes /roOT (or of) a noble family, n flammt au8 eitiem CbCtn |)aufc; to translate from Latin into English, auS bem Sateintf^cn in« (Sngtif^ie aitt' fegen ; to sing from music, nai^ JJOten ftngcn ; I come from Naples, i^ lomntc bou flteaptl', to paint from nature, naify bcr,9lotur ■ntalcn ; from vanity, ou8 n » tJie market, anf bent 97?aifte; in the meantime, etnflloeiten ; in memory of, jnm Snbcn- fen an. (ace.); »n the midst of, mitten in (dat. or ace); in my opinion, meinec SKeinung naUf ; in pen and inJc, mii gcber Utlb Sinte; in your place, an ^^xtt ©telfe; in place of, anfiatt (prep, with gen.); in praise (of), jum Sobe; in the press, nniet bet ^rcffe; in print, im ©rude; in proportion to, im Ser^altniS mit; in the reign, nniet bet Siegietung ; there is nothing true in Ae report, t€ iil nitl>W SGBo^reS an bent Serii^tc; in short, furj unb gut; small in staiure, tltin t>on @ef}alt; in the street, anf bet @ttafe; in tlummnds, jn Siaufenben; in time, jni re^iten 3eit) in this way, onf bieft SBSeife; in fine weather, 6ei fc^onem Setter; in no wise, nm nic^td ; in a tcorci, mit etneni S9Sorte ; in the world, onf bet SBelt; in vrriting, fi^tiftltl^ (adj. and adv.). Of. Of an afternoon, bcg Sta^mittagd ; of age, munbtg;10 years of age, im Sitter bOn 10 Sojrfn ; the battle of Austerlitz, bie ©(Jlai^t &ei9.; unger iterbcn ; the city of London, bie ©tobt S.; of the name of N., mit 9Jamen 31.; o/ necessity, not^ wenbigerweife; of loood, avi ^tH^. On. On account of , XttQtn (gen.); on Ids arrival, 6ei feiiier 2(nfunft; on good autliority, bon guter ^onb; on the bank of the river, am Ufet bc8 gluffeg; on board, an Serb; on board ship, jn ©(^liffe; on 'change, onf ber Sotfe; on this condition, nnter biefet Sebin< gnng; on condition that, untet bet Sebingung baf ; on Me con- §296.] The Prepositions. 239 tmry, im ©egent^eU; Dresden is situated on the Elbe, S. tifgt an btr (gibe; mi fire, in Sranb; on foot, jn guf ; o» my honour, onf metncSJte; on Aor«e6otcJ, jn ^ferbc; on a journey, anf ber 3lcife; o» iAe lO^A of July, am 10"" Outi; ore tonrf, jn Satibc; 0)1 ^Aw occasion, Set btcfct ©etcgetl^eit; om ^am of death, bei SebcnSfltafe ; a treatise on painting, cine Slb^nnblung u6er b«e SKalcrei; to yut down on paper, jn ^iapicr bringen; on pretext of, untet bent Sorwanbe; on purpose, objt(^tIt(^, or mit SBiden; onrecfiipio/, natl^ Smpfong (gen.); on the roof, ouf bcm 2)a($e, bad ®a#; on «Ae sea, jue (See; o» 'tti |)aufeg. Ago. A year ago, bat Ctncm Sa^te. As far as=6i8 an or 6i8 ju. As far as the tovm-hall, 618 an bag But for. But for -you, o^ne bt$. f/om behind = ^nUx—^iXWX, he came from behind the door, it (am ^inttv ber X^iixi l)etbov. From under=mUx—^ttWX, from under the bed, untct bcm Scttc t)tVt)Ot. In the mid,dle o/=in ttx SWitte. Sn bet a«itte beS $anfi'S. Or, mitten untcr:— mitten nnte« Saffen ru^t' ie^ (G.), im tte m«Ws< of arms I reposed. Opposite. Opposite the stable, bcm ©tatte 8«flenii6er. To within. To within a mile, of Cologne, 613 anf cine SWeife bon Sotn. Until. Until 6 o'clock, 6i8 5 ttjr; w'e shall not come until 6 o'clock, tbtr werben etft «m 6 U^r fommen. Wp to = anf, with a verb compounded with ;n : — a«f ben ^fluptmonn snlaufen, to run up to the captain; I go up to him,i(!^ Qt^t anf i^n 5n. Up to the knees, 6i8 an bie Slliee. [Exercise 98.] 297. Verbs, Adjectives, and Nouns, with their Prepositions. We give a few hints as to the general import of the prepositions when connected with verbs, adjectives, and nouns. These hints will,- of course, not cover nearly all instances given in the lists "below. Most of the others, however, may be explained by the special signi- fications of the prepositions as given in §§ 289-294. Q 242 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XIV. 9(n, with the dative, implies contiguity, close concern, "with respect to." Hence used with verbs signifying to doubt, resemble, suffer, iDoand, waiU, die, and adjectives like experienced, like, eta With the accusative it denotes a close approach to, literally and figuratively. Hence used with to believe, think, write, ticcustom, address (cf. § 293, note). @esen implies conduct towards. It mostly occurs with adjectives like kind, cruel, attentive, polite, etc. 9} a 4 signifies a striving after. Hence found after verbs denoting to strive, long for, cry for, etc. Uiiec occm-s before words expressing an emotion of the mind, such as joy, anger, disgust, laughter, surprise, shame, etc. Um is found before words denoting the subject of the action expressed by the verb, and closely resembles ubei in this respect. With a few verbs the two are in fact used with a very slight shade of diSerence (as Weinen, trauern). w>n is more figurative in its representation, while tint chiefly occurs after verbs expressing a real action, sVich as to speak, beg, apply, trouble, etc. SB or implies repulsion. Hence found with verbs like to beuxi/re, pro- tect, flee, be-afraid, etc. The following list is, of course, not complete. Synonyms are not, as a rule, given. For example, angry will be found, but not incensed, enraged, indignant, etc. ; to set out, but not to start, to depart, the pre- position being the same. Those with the same preposition as in English are also, generally speaking, omitted, as well as all words of rare occurrence. (a. = accusative; d.== dative.) About. (See siao At.) Verbs — care, see trouble quarrel, flrdtttt Ultt complain, Kageii u6et (a.) talk, fprec^en iibtt (a.) doubt, }tt)eifeln an (d. ) trouble, ^i) bemit^en um enquire, fti^ (rfunbtgen uber (a.) „ (heed), %i) befummnn nm § 297.] The Prepositions. 243 Adjectives — anxious, teforgt um Noun — doubt, 3»e{fet an (d.) About — continued. doubtful, jweifeljaft ii6cr (a.) Verbs— guard, Rtp pten i)Or (d.) lean, ftc^ antejncn an (d. and a.) Adjective — secure, ft(^er i>or (d.) Vebbs — aim, jtelcu na^, Uretcn naii^ barh, anbeUen (a.) connive, n0(^fejen (a.) cry, minen fiber (a.) estimate, Berc^nen ju fire, fii^iefcn auf (a.) grasp, greifen nai^ grumble, muncn iibet (a.) Utugh, tai^en fiber (a.) hole, anfcjen (a.) mock, fpotfcn fiber (a.) Adjectives — abashed, befc^omt fiber (a.) afflicted, betrfibt fiber (a.) affronted, bctetbigt fiber (a.) aglmst, befifitjt fiber (a.) ammsed, belufitgt fiber (a.) angry (at a person), bofe auf / „ (ai a tiling), jomtg fiber (to he) angry, jCmen (d.) amaoyed, vexed, see Verbs Against. warn, warnen Bor (d.) At. play, fp{cten (a.) rejoice, jtc(i frcucn fiber (a.) stare, anflarren (a.) stay, bteiben or ^6j ouf^ottcn bet swear, fllu^en ouf (a.) throw, werfen nacb weep, wetnen fiber (a.) wonder, )i(^ ttjunbem fiber (a.) be vexed or annoyed, jtc^ Srgem fiber (a.) astonished, crftaunt fiber (a.) busy, bcfi^ofttgt mit clever, gcftbtrft in (d.) erribarrassed, Ucrtegen um frightened, erfi^rocEen fiber (a.) grieved, betrfibt fiber (a.) impatient, ungebalten fiber (a.) pleased, erfreut fiber (a.) surprised, erUaunt fiber (a.) 244 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XIV. At — continued. Nouns— impatience, Ungebulb mtt eatis/action, Sufrirtenjett tntt joy, etc., grcube, etc., iibcr (a.) Veees — aMde, Mctbcit iti hear, pten an (d.) jvdge, utt^eitcn na$ know, fcnnen an (d.) recognise, etfennen on (d.) AdJEC'I'IVKS — aniTnated, itUH bur($, ongc« trieben »on regulate, etnrt^ien no(^ see, anfc^en an (d.) „ crfc^en auS^ set store, S)icl fatten auf (a.) ^tand, beijjejen (d.) captivated, angcnommen fur For. Verbs — account, erffaten (a.) admire, betvunfeein wegen apologise, p^ entf^utbigen tt)c= gen apply, fJ$ itmxbtn urn ask, 1 bitten urn, ftagen nac^ {en- beg, ) quire for) atone, abbttfen (a.) Name, tabetn wegen care, ft$ fumnteTn urn commemd, loben toegen crave, oetlangen nac^ cry, f^reien na$ embark, (t(^ einfc^iffen na(^ engmire, fi^ crtuiibigen na$, ftogen naify envy, beneibcn urn exchange, au^iauf^en gegen feel, bemittetben (a.) go, geben na$, boten (a.) hope, boffenouf (a.) lameru, beflagen (a.) long, ft($ febnen naib look, fucben make, jugeben auf (a.) mourn, frauetn um, betiauern (a.) pardon, )>CTgeben (d. and a., see § 372) play, fpielcn um prepare, ft($ Dorbcreiten ouf (a.) search, fucben (a., or nacb) send, f$i({en na^" set out, abretfen na$ stipulate, au^bebingen (a.) ^ 3(^ fe^e te ivc an ben Slugtti an, I see it by your eyes; ic^ ctfe^e caii ttin fflerii^c, I see by the report. " Also fpmmen laffm, l^otcn taffen : i^ lafft ben 91c)t |otm. § 297.] The Prepositions. 245 For — continued. stretch out {the hand), au^fliecfen strive, (Irebcn nai$ me, ^6) bewerten urn take, gotten flit 'JBeruJmt ttjegcn Adjectives — athirst, bcgtctig noc^ bound, beflimmt na(^ cdehraied, ") famed, considerate, bcba(i^t auf (a.) clamorous, bcgtertg noii) destined, bejitmmt JU (purpose) „ „ m^ [place) Nouns — affection, Sicbc JU capacity, gfi^igfett JU care, ©orge um compassion, SWittetb mit contempt, fStxatfytlxriQ (gen.) cure, IKittet gcgcn desire, Setlangen na(i& fear, gutf^t »0r (d.) greed, Scgictbe no# ?™t«, njortcn auf (a.) lueep {for joy), tveinen i)Ot (d.) ,, (a person), bcWeftieu (a.) or tBEtncn um viish, wiinfc^en (a.) e«cK«ec^;}''"^8eIe9t8u fit, ffljig ju Trvemorahle, beiiltttfirbtg wcgen prepared {mentally), gefaft fluf (a.) rearfy, bcreit JU so)T^, / am sorry for him, n tjut mir teib (see § 270) love, Stebc JU (a) match for, gcWO^fetl (d.) Tnaterial,, ©tOff JU pUy, STOtttefb mit request, Sttte um regard, ■>„,,, sorrow, SSebauem (gen.) From. Verbs — absolve, cntbtnbctl (gen., see §371) abstain, ft^ entbolten (gen.) occnifi, ctTOoi^fcn au« conclude, fc^liegcn flU« dissuade, flbtfltbcn (d. of person, a. of thing) exempt, tni^thttl (gen., see §371) /ee, flic^cn »0t (d.) in/er, f^tte^en auS judge, urt^cttcn na(^ presence, bCTOflbten WV (d.) ^ro<6c«, fc^u^cn »or (d.) save, retten Don, or aixS, it(|ern »or (d.) s«/er-, Ieibenon(d.) taJte (see § 379) 246 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XIV. From — coTitintied. In. Adjectives — different, i>eifi$ieben Don free, ftei »on Vekbs — abound, tBtmittcIn DOlt acquiesce, eintviUtgen in (jt) hdieve, gTauben an (a.) concur, bcipfli^tcn (d.) consist, Befle^en in (d.) delight, fi^ fteuen iiber (a.) „ ©efallen ftnbcn an (d.) dovbt, jwcifein an (d.) ^^^^'jbcfi^aftigen mit engage, ) "> -> excel, ubctttcfFen an (d.) hinder, uer^inbeni an (d.) Adjectives — assidiums, unabldfjtg mit careless, na^Iafitg in (d.) dad, gefleibet in (d.) „ geJuDt in (a.) deficient, mangel^aft on (d.) engaged, bef^aftigt ntit experienced, etfa^rcn an (d.) fruitfid, ftu^tbar an (d.) Nouns — aeration, ^nbCTung an (d.) belief, ®(aube an (a.) confidence,\^nixamn auf(a.), trust, / or Jul delight, jfteube uber (a.) deficiency, SKangel an (d.) safe, jt^en)or(d.) persevere, bc^arrcn bei persist, bejarren auf (d.) rejoice, ^(^ eifteuen an (d.) resenMe, glei^cn an (d.) spend (time), jubringen mit succeed — / succeed in the under- taMng, 'oai Unteine^men gelingt mit surpass, iibetttcffen an (d.) trade, ^anbeln mit trust, ttertrauen auf (a.) v;ound, uetmunbcn an (d.) (to be) inferior-to, na^lMcn (d.) like, dbnti^ an (d.) poor, arm on (d.) rich, rcit^ on (d.) sBlled, gef^ttft in (d.) strong, hflftig on (d.) versed, bewanbert in (d.) interest, S^eilno^me on (d.) (to take) part, %^tii nejmcn an (d.) pleasure, SSetgniigen an (d.) to take pleasure in, ©efatlen ftnben on (d.) share, SIntJeil on (d.) ' @t fc^i 9Sertt(iuen auf mid), ffat SSertrauen gn mic. § 297.] The Prepositions. 247 Vbbbs — cKciise, bef^ulbigen (gen.) admit, jutaffcn (a.) apprise, bena(^ri(i^ttgen (gen. approve, btdtgei) (a. ) asmre, Uerjic^ein (gen.) avail oneself, benu^en (a.), bebtenen (gen.) hearnie, wcrben flUg ieg, bitten (a.) beware, (tct) ^fitcn »0t (d.) hoast, ^i) tii^men (gen.) ekar, bcftcien son complain, flagen fiber (a.) consist, beftepen tmmetn »on perish, amtommen t)OX (d.) tax. See charge, present, f(|enfcn (d. and a.) See tremble, jittem i)Or (d.) § 375. trust, onl5Cttrauen (d. and a.) provide, scrfc^en mtt weep, weinen wx (d.) remonstrate, SBorjicttungen mo= (^cn (d.) Adjectives — acquainted, bcfonnt mtt delighted, crfKUt itbcr (a. ) affeded, ergrtffen »on disgusted, entport iiber (a.) afflicted, bctrubt fiber (a.) familiar, »crtrout mit (to he) alive, wtmmein tton fatigued, ermflbet son angry. See At pleased, jufrtebcn mtt animated, bcfeelt »0n popular, beltebt bci charmed, entjiidt »on ««n«Gi (flg. ), erf iidt mtt contented, Jllfrieben mit weary. See fatigued Noun — in love, vertiebt in (a.) 298. Some Common Idioms with Prepositions. 3Cn: @S if} on rair (or bte SJei^e ifl on mir) ju fpteten, it is my turn to 3^ fommc an bie Stei^t, or i _. CO .<. t i „'j: } my turn has com£, ©te SRet^e fommt an mt^, j " ain ben Sog fommen,-to come to light. aiit unb ffir ftC^, in itself {per se). TiaS ifj on unb fur ftc^ einc ber griiftcn SBo^^rJeiten {truths). 3e^ iBcrfe i6m frine Untteue sot, / reproach him with his infidelity. 252 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XIV. 9(w Seben, aMve. 3la^e an etnanber, close together. sin ben Sag bitngen, to bring to light. aittf: 3btf ber ^Ut fdn, to be on one's guard. 9(nf einittal, all of a sudden. ilnf SBieberfei^en, au revoir. SaS gejt onf @ie, *Ao< is meant for { or r^'er* to) you. 34l lfltt« *iri "ttf • • • (aoo.) / tliink a deal of . . . Stnf ber SRetfe, travelling. 9t»f mein SGBott, upon my word. 9(nf ben $anben tragen, to treat with regard. atnf ber $anb liegen, to be self-evident. 3tuf iittt $)er}en ^aben, to have at heaH. ainf "8 ©pict fe^en, to stake. @jner @a$e (dat.) anf ben ®runb ge^en, to sift thoroughly. 9ln8 ben Slugen »crlieren, to lose sight of. aittS bera ©tegreife, extempore. 9tu8 ber Safung fontmen, to be disconcerted. Mas ber gofung bringen, to disconcert. 3[u8 bei $anb in ben ^unb leben, to live from hand to mouth. 3# ma^e mir nil^t^ auS bre ©at^e, it is a matter of indifference to me. atitS DoUem $alfe f^reien, to scream w>fA ail one's might. @t^ an8 bent ©taube mac^en, to run away. 93 et 3etten, betimes. S8ei ©innen fein, to be in one's right mind (of. 6on)- $8ei |tc$ be^alten, to keep secret. aSei Sobegjhofe, on pain ofdeaih. »e{ alle bent, /or dU that. ©4)erj 6ei ©eite,/oi»nsr apart. ®ei ©ette treten, to step aside. § 298.] The Prepositions. 253 ^ittnen : SBinnen ^itt unb einem So^re, between now and a year. 3)ucri^ einanber, piU-m&e. SiUKiQ bic Sfnget fejen, to viinJc or connive at. 5fftt: giit 5 SKatf Stbbeercn, jJw shillings' worth of strawherries. @tn> ftti; aVitmai, once for all. Scb f St ntcin S^tit, / /or mi/ part. gtoaS fiii; fetn Seben gem tjun, «o be passionately fond of doing SSaS ^aben @ie eegen t^n ? H''%a< i^'ection have you to him ? 34) &0^C nf^t^ bagegen, / have no objection. @in Slbfcr gegen einen ©petting, an eagle as compared with a sparrow. ®cn (for gegen) fitmmet, up to heaven. ^inUt : i^iniec einanber, consecutively; 10 Sage ^inttt einonbct, 10 days S«5 14 guf in bie ?ange (SteitC), lift, in length (breadth). Sr gebt in'S je^ntC ^a^X, he is entering his tenth year. Sn ben Sog Jinein leben, to live for the day (i.e. tahe no thought for the morrow). 3 m S^eten, m the open air. Sw SSegrtffe, about, on the point of; ©ie tt>oren int Segriife abjureifcn (to start). Stt ben SBinb reben, to waste one's breath. Sn ©ranb f}e(Jen,to set on fire. Sn8 SGBerl fe^en, to take in hand. 9n 3?er(egen^eit fein, to be in a fix. 254 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XTV. Sn SScrtegcnJcit fc|en, to embarrass. n SBorauS, beforehand. Stt OJnmac^t faffen, to sieoon. Sn bet SJeget, as a rafe. Sn bie Sreuj unb Huer, »» all directions. ©tej in %e^t nepnten, to take care. Sn Slnfptu^ nejmen, to cfosm, occupy, take up; ba6 nimmt biet 3ett in anfprui^. Sn bie gtu(i^t fi^lagen, to pm« to flight. Sn Siflaunen fegen, to astonish. aWit: SBlit gcnauet 3lotJ entfommcn, to have a narrow escape. suit bet 3eit, »» time. ®a« wetbe it^ mit bet 3eit etletnen, / tmll learn that in time. Slai^ Setieben, as you please. 3&ai befommen ©ie? s»odj Selieben, gncibigei ^ctr. What is your charge ? What you please, sir. S)em 3lnf(^etne na$, apparently. Utttet'. Slei^ig u6e« bet 2lrbeit fein, to be working hard. ®a3 ging fi6er meine SBiinf^e, tlua exceeded my wishes. @g gejt nic^tS fiSet boS SJeifen, thare is no enjoyment like travel- ling. (£t fonnte ei ni^it fl6ei: bo8 $etj biingen, he could not make up his mind. U6et SlJa^t bleiben, to stay the night. U6ei! aUe ^Rafen, excessively. § 298.] The Prepositions. 255 iiset folii^e Slmmenmarcjen 6in i^ weit Jinau«. (Kotzebue.) / am far above mch nursea' tales. fiiiec titoai (ace.) fc^tepen, to miss, overshoot the mark. Sad gejt after mcine ^roftC, that is above my strength. VLbtt fur J Cbct lang, sooner or later. iiftet atlc SBegrtffe, beyond all conception. (Stnmal iiftera anbcre, again and again. Sen Sog U6ee, aU day long. fieee §oId itnb .Scpf, headlong. SBid after bte O^rett, o«er &ead anrf ears. Sag gejt «6e« b«n ©pag, eaj; afoucJ to oneself. aSoi; furjcr 3cit, not long ago. S8or 3ctten, informer times. 3«: 3» SKitfag (ju) effen, eUihough, though obittoH ) fo, however (see § 315) ungeat^tet (baf ), notwithstanding 308. Also the following, which may be called rdativt amjimdions, each being equivalent to a relative expression : fvann=um weld^c 3ett/ ai i^hkh time. tveS^alb (compounded of an old word^alb, side, on the part of, on account of, and Wef, obsolete genitive of Wai)=on what or which account. WO, where WOper, where from WOf>tn, whe/re to WOrouf, etc., where/upon, etc. WOnn, when ttJtC, how warum, j We^^db, \ why, wherefore iDie »tel, Aoto mwA; wie lange, Aow iow^/ wie oft, hm often, etc. ©agen ©t'e mir toatum @ie jietS fo ubel gelaunt ftnJi. feZZ me why you are always so ill-tempered. Sci^ wet^ nid()t twic longe ev in ber ©(^weij geMietcii ift. * SWun raeine Sii^n jerjlott ftnfc, 5a eg regnetfonnen @ie nic^t au^ge^en. 311. /f, w'h.eo.=whether, is o!&; in a conditional sentence it is menn : Ask the sexton if (whether) the door is shut. grage ben Mfitv, ob (not menn) bte S:^ure p tjl. If you knew how I feel. .aScutt ©te rougten wte (es) mix ift. 312. Omission of tvenn anrf oB. — These conjunctions can be omitted ; ia which, case inversion of the verb and sub- ject takes place as in English (had I time, for: if I had time) : 2Benn i6) an Sprer e^! oh dear/ mt fo? indeed? atfo ! well then I nun? Weill pfut ! fie ! for shame ! yx tt)0|)I ! oh yes 1 certainly ! fort ! goon/ away / hegone / b! ) , }ahl alas/ '{^^,}hush! ^alt ! stop / (etber! alas/ unfortunately/ I am sorry to say ^ topp! agreed/ Slctltung! take care/ jte|>e! lo/ behold/ tVO^Ian ! well then / @ott bewa^re h God forbid/ 6ett)apre ! JoA avfnt wv. He rep-oached the secretary with his ingratitude. 3c?) no1»m bem S^rdnttcn ben ^iiQtl ai, (Sch.) I took the bridle from the tyrant. ' To avoid awkwardness of expression a sentence like this would be contracted by § 408 into id; »)«« , . . fle^en fleStieten. S 274 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. ZVII. 330. But, the least emphatic place in a Genrum sentence being immediately after the verb, the following rules come in : (i) Short pronouns, whether dative or accusative, immedi- ately foUow the finite verb : Ttein Sriiber ^at wit neuK^ wert^sottc ©efi^enfe (presents) gcmat^t. Sv roftrt (shaves) ftii^ Kebe SBod^e jwetmal. 2Ber yat fie beiner j^reitnbin oorgejiettt? (introiwxS). 3(^ ^abt e§ metnem SSetter empfo^ten (recommended). 3c^ \)(xht i^m ein ©cebab (sea-bathing) empfoljlen. (2) If both are pronouns the accusative generally precedes : Sa0 uting eui^ jum S^ri|)en mai^t, mai^t tuH) mit jum Suben. (L.) WliM makes me a Christian in your eyes, makes you in my eyes a Jew. This is often a mere matter of euphony. The same author (Eobneb) has:— „@ebcn ©ie mir iftn, mein Sater," and,, St ^aX fie (Aerji^m BerWfigeit"; and Goethe: Sa$ mit fie. 331. Rule 330 explains why in inversion pronouns, and sometimes even other words, come between the verb and its subject : Sietlcit^t tettet s»tii) rncin Seigcrn. (G.) Perhaps my refusal will save you, ^at uns ber $en ni^t Der}U(en? Has not the gentleman pardoned us ? Se^t ciitjultt fiO) miv aUs0. (Sch.) Now everything is revealed to me. ©0 erjfiSten meniflftens einige ©(^riftftcaer. (R.) So, at least, some authors relate. Note. — Not of course when the subject is itself a pronoun: not batum iringe S^nen xi) bit Soifec, but Sringe i«i Stuett . • . i 332, 333.] Order of Words. 275 332. Inversion in Simple Sentences. For the sake of emphasis, to vary the construction, to prevent the juxta- position of too many adverbs, or for other reasons, any member of the sentence can be removed from its usual place to the beginning. In this case the subject must always follow the verb. This inversion most frequently occurs in the case of adverbs : Ser attc^ter wtrb ticid^fiena bfe Slngetlagten oerpiiren. The judge will shortly try the accused. Sla^fteng twicb bet SR. bte 31. vevMren. Die Sliigeflagten tttxtt bee 9i. iicic^fteng ser^oreii. aSer^iiren toirb be« 01. m6)^tU bt'e 21. 9»acbet^ f^alit ic^ fur ©^alefveare'g tejleS Kpeateiv pcE. (G.) Macbeth I consider Shakespeare's lest play. aaSetneit HfoIIte t«i^ ntit 3:^nen gevn. (L.) Fain would I weep with you. Sangfam gtng bet ai6t in'g ^fojier juriicf. (Scheffer.) Slowly the abbot returned to the convent. Note.^- An apparent exception is when an adverb refers to the subject and must for emphasis be immediately followed by it : StuO) bte SKufii iti'dffmt bie tutlbe 8cibenf$aft. (Wieland.) Mvsic, too, subdues wild passions. mnv bie 9iotf> enifiigulbigt'd. (G.) OwZj/ necessity excuses it. fSefonieti iet ^itr CibetUlftev ^at eg gea^nbet. yAe senior master^ in particular has censured it. 333. A wisb is expressed in both languages by inversion: aSSee idj nur ba gewcfen! Hadlbut hem there! ' Head Master is Siretot; SUtxWfyca is chief of the staff of masters. 276 Rules of Syntax. [Ohap. XVII. 334. Sometimes a well-known fact is stated by way of argument. Tlie form in English is interrogative; in German inversion with the adverb boc^ is used ;! „SaS SSie^ gramt pcd." „3Borum fottte tS nti^t? ®r8mcn toij! un3 bo^ auc^." (Immeemann.) " The animal is fretting." " Why should it not ? Do we not also fret?" SSat So« iebet: ®tnjeine ein 3;t;cil beS ©anjen- (Ebees.) Was not each indiuidual apart of the whole? So also : apSuftten ttitfcgia atlc. You will admit that we all knew it. 335. Position of Adverbs. In a simple sentence an adverb can only precede the finite verb in inversion {see above). In the natural order all adverbs follow : I sddom read is ((^ Icfe fcUen,not tc^fettctl tcfe. (i) Adverbs of Time. With a simple tense these usually follow the object : 3(^ fa^ biefcn ficrrn geHern. With a compound tense, especially 4f they are short, they immedi- ately follow the finite verb : Set ^Jrtnj Jot B.ftets fctnc Untcrtjancn bdcibigt. The prince has often offended his mbjects. iV'bte.— But cr l^nt uttS mt^tmalS in aSetlin Sefui^t, for the reason given in § 330, I. They precede other adverbs : 3i^ ]pobc ifttttt ntrgcnb^ SJie JJcbcr gefejctt. dt if} iiefen fSSiaitt jcjnmal auf bent Sod gewefen. Note the order in tics aJJorgenS urn ttcun U^v, at nine o'clock in the morning. aHe Sage iim i)i£fcl6e 3cit, every day at the same tim^. ^ No doubt a confusion of two constructions. §§ 336, 337.] Order of Words. 277 (2) Adverbs of Manner and Degree usually precede the word or words they qualify, unless it be a verb in a simple tense : ®t §at fetnc Slufgabcn {exercises) f^ftied^t Qtf(t)xieitn. 3i^ fann biefe« ©fficE nti^t Berjle^en. 3c& bin fceinem Sruber f elten ju ^fcrbc bcgegnct (me<). Der ©teb §at iifi^st ben ftertn beiio^Icn [robbed) fonbctn fetncn Stcner. with a simple tense they precede or follow the object : @t fi^retbt feine Slufgabe fc^Icijt. St flc^t feme getter ni«t. (3) Adverbs of Place usually follow the object and all other adverbs, and hence come immediately before the perfect participle or infinitive : SDSir ^abcn feine Sinber &ort gefejen. Ser f)irt ^at oft baS 35ie^ onf iie asief e getrtcbcn. 336. The above are the principal rules, but the same sentence may be arranged in different ways according to the word or words it is advisable to emphasise. Remember the chief rules : — (a) The most emphatic place is before the verb (finite or infinite). (5) The least emphatic place is immediately after the verb (finite). B. Subordinate Sentences. 337. Postpoaement of Verb. — In subordinate sentences the finite verb comes at the end : Sgmont ueretntgte aUe aSorjiiije, bit t»en J^elben Bilben. (ScH.) E. combined all the good qualities which go to make a hero. @r kfa^T, balf 2000 mtxUv aMfft^ctt foHteit. (Hoffmann.) He ordered 2000 horsemen to mownt. ©ewd^rc mix etne 23ttte, twettn tcft Jc^t ftcrfeen tuexbe. (H.) Grant me a request, if I am now to die. 278 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XVn. 338. If the conjunction baff is omitted, the order is that of a principal sentence : 3c^ mi% @te teerben tntc^ Jebaiievn. I Jcnow you will pity me. Note 1. — In the case of an infinitival clause dependent upon a sub- ordinate sentence the latter may be, and usually is, considered to end before the infinitival clause : 5)a er fidji iiid^t gcmeigett ^nt, kie SJeJiutafion ju em))faii3en, is better than : ba ec, tie S)e)}utatii)ti ju emt)fansen, fi($ nic^t gewcignt §ot. Ss l^ot ongefoitgcn ju tegnen, or c8 ^ni gu rcgncn ongcfnngen. Note 2. — If one auxiliary does duty for two or more verbs it follows the last : ®ie fi^ien jU uBevJcgen, sSb (ie mtt bem wvMte^enen §iit^en fi(5 tti kit ©toM Wogcn, okcrbenncuenauSker§utfc^a($tctne5nicnfi>Bte. (P. Hetse.) She seemed to be considering whether she should venture into the town with the faded hat or take the new one from the hat-box, 339. When there are already two infinitives, or (more rarely) a par- ticiple and infinitive at the end, the finite verb usually precedes them : 3i$ tnii@te etn @$uife fetn, wenn i(^ mt$ tonuit intim taffctt. (G.) I should (have-to) be a villain, if I could persuade myself. Sog Sitb {image) baS 3Je6ufob=9Jejar ^otte fe^en laffeu. (Dan. iii. 3.) Note. — This order may also be resorted to, to avoid the coming together of words of a similar sound : 3>a rove von kem Surjien fetbfi metken emfifangeii isccken (not enit>fangen ucckcn tDctfccn), . . . shall be received. 340. In a subordinate sentence the least emphatic place is imme- diately before the subject ; hence a short unemphatic word, even when a pronoun in an oblique case (especially fiiJ^), usually comes here : @0 War ein ®\M baf fiiij fctn Slacken fanb. (Wieland.) It was a good thing that no boat was found. 3c not^bcm es bte Scute fatten. (Horn.) According as the people had it. SBetl bo«t lein (Sctrctbe ju finben wax. Because no com was to be found there. T)a f iit mi(^ fetite 3iiije mf^t ^ier ift. As there is no more repose for me here. i 341-342.] Compound Sentences. 27? 341. Inversion in Subordinate Sentences. — This can only take place when the conjunctions tuenn and oh are omitted {see § 312) : Oteben hitt jegt, ticrfawmcln ftitt un^ je^t, fo ^etgt e«, etc. (G.) If we talk now, if we assemble now, it will he said, etc. (ii wov t^m, a\i §attc ct getraumt. (Scheffel.) _ It seemed to him as if he had dreamt. S)te 33raune wtejierte, aU tuoHtc ftc ffagen. (Im.) The hrown mmre neighed, as if she wished to complain. O. Compound Sentences. 342. Inversion. — In compound sentences the subordinate sentence may either precede or follow. If the subordinate sentence precedes, the finite verb and subject in the principal sentence are inverted : 3nbem ev bie^ fagte, ^attc tt ben ^er^og am SKocE ergnffen. (Sch.) Saying this, he had seized the Duke hy the coat. %\i tx ftc^ ermflbet ntebevfe^te, begann bet ^avx^ merct jit ipm. (Fr.) Wlien he sat dowrl wearied, the chamberlain began. ^ote. As the pre-position of the subordinate sentence already in itself causes inversion, it is useless to place any word for emphasis at the head of the principal one, (but see next section) ; not : S>a ii^ gepevn nidljt ju a)m gc^en tcnntc, Ijeute tnm ev git mir, but . . . tarn er Scute . . . 280 Order of Words. [Chap. XVH 343. Insertion of fo. @o is often inserted before the inversion, especially after causal sentences : Scnn bic brci Sanbcr ba^lten tote twit brei, fo moc^ten »it aitU tci^t tinai »Crm6gcn. (Sch. ) If the three provinces thought as we do, we might be able to do something. aSenn bte Saucrn Srob effcn wotten, fo fomicn pe fribfl bsii $flug jicjc. (GrRUBE.) If the peasants want to have bread to eat, they can draw the pJoiigh themselves. ©a cin ®mitin im Slnjug roar, fo jogcrtcii wit. As a storm was approaching we hesitated. Note. — The break in a sentence for the insertion of another sentence or clause (not, of course, a relative one) should occur after the verb, not after the subject as in English : Sut they, when they had heard the report, hurried into the burning house. 3ll)ec pe eilteii, iia^bcm |ie ten Jfnott ge^ort l^atten, in baS Btenneiitt ^mi. [Exercises 57 and 104.] §344.] The Article. 281 Chapter XVIII. The Article. 344. Definite Article Inserted. — When there is no article in English use one in German in the following instances : — (i) Before the names of species, materials, and abstract nouns when the whole species, material, or quality is referred to : bte @4)ttff/ ^^^P > bte 9Jtenf^en, men {homines). ba^ S3Iet, lead; ber te ^olbe greube (W.), gentle joy. (5) Speaking familiarly of persons when there can be no doubt to whom we refer : Set Satt, bie fatti. 3$ bin foebcn 6eim ®corg gcroefcn. Note. — Not however referring to families : 3c?» trnr 6ei 2HfiIta:8, at the Midlers'. (6) Before nouns of different genders repeat the article (pronoun, etc.). The house and garden, btt^ ^ani unb bet Oavtcil. Eis son and daughter, fcin ©o^n unb fetiie ZoA)ter, (7) In the following expressions : — 3n ber fitrij^e, al chwch in bie ^ixi^e, to church 2luf bent Wiaxti, at market auf ben 3Kavft, to market 3n ber ©c^ule, at school in bte ©(^ule, to school 3n ber ©tabt, m town in bie ©tobt, to town SSRxt ber ©ifenbapn, hy rail auf bem SSerberfe, on deck Exceptions : (a) Froverbs and short pithy sayings take no aiiicle as in English : 9i0ti fennt {etn ®ebot, necessity knows no law. ®oIt> jtcjt magnetifilet aU ©tjiinjett, 333t^ unb Sugcnb. (W.) (6) It is omitted in enumerating nouns : Men, women and children, Ttarmn, SBcibeT iinb Stnbcr. § 345.] The Article. 283 345. Article (Definite and Indefinite) omitted. When there is an article in English, omit it in German — (i) After fciw, fwetbcn and bletbett to denote a calling, profession, etc. : @r|i war-et Befwe the atrrimal of the train. 284 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XVIU. 9la(5 ©mpfang bcS SttefeS. On receipt of the letter, SKit etgnien Stugcn. inth one's ou^n eyes, Slnfang (Snbc) auguft. At the beginning (end) of August IHad) 3?orben (etc.) ©egen ©iiben. To the north. Towards the south. So also: 8u(l ^abtn, to have a mind, to feel inclined ®Cfo^r loufen, to run the risk. SSort fatten, to keep one's word. 3n O^nma^t fatten, to fail in a faint, to fain ^(^t Job en, to have a care. 346. Definite Article in Geiman, Indefinite in English. Nouns of weight and measure preceded by the price, etc., take the definite article in German : gunf 2KarI bie (5tte, 5 mks. a yard. SSteimal bie S55o^e,/owr times a week.^ Note. — The genitive is sometimes found : er [(^Wt mi^ je^nmdl Sc8 Sags. (G.) ... ten times a day. • The contracted forms tm, am, etc., seem sometimes to stand for in eiitem, an einem, etc. : Sm ^o^cn @cat>(, to a high degree, SInt weiicn Stiait, in a white dress. 9(tn taufi^enben Sai^e, on a rippling brooh. Sum ®ef(^tnte,/or a preserU. Stn «rriff, in a drde. i 347-348.] The Article. 285 347. Article preferred to Possessive Adjective. Unless it is essential to denote the possessor, the Germans use the simple article where we would put a possessive adjective, provided, of course, no ambiguity arises : 2)er ^itbel ptett ben ^ut an bcr ^rcmpe im WlauU^ (Horn.) The poodle held his hat by the hrvm in his mouth. @te trug etnen ^ranj tti ben .5)aaven. (Sch.) She wore a wreath in her hair. 348. Position of the Article, different in English and in German : ®in Rafter Sag Site bop^ette ©umme ®te beiben Stnbet ettt fo grower S^etc^ @itt gans gfo^er ^of half a day. double the sum. both the children, so large a pond, quite a large yard. (ginc ju brette 3orfe too broad a jacket. ©in foT(i^er 8orm such a noise. (but ^oW e''n Sarm, see § 134.) 1 ajiout (n.), of animals; SBunb (m,), ofhvman beings. 286 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XIX. Chapter XIX. Concord and Apposition. 349. Agreement with Subject. A verb agrees witk its subject, even if a collective singular, in number and person : bod ©$flf bliift {bleats), bit ®^afe blofcn, ijr left, ye read. fcie ganje ©emetnbc {congregation) fJanb ouf. cine groge Solfentenge wor »crfommeIt. (So also of bcr Slbct, the nohility, bad ^axloXMni, parliament, etc.) 350. In cases like ctn ?5aar |)anbfcju&e, cin Su^enb ®tet, cine 3(nja^r Officicrc, the nouns ^onbfi^u^c and ©ier and Officicre may be treated as if they were the real nominatives, though in fact they are genitives (see § 360) : ©in ©lt|enb S3irnen finb im Sorbc, 12 pears are in the basket. 351. Two or more Subjects. A verb with two or more subjects in juxtaposition or connected by unb generally stands in the plural: ©ad f>aud unb bieS^cuncn (bams) betfitannien. But if the nouns are closely connected in sense, so as to form one idea, the singular is frequently found, — or if, though opposite in meaning, they belong together : ^ ©a flel ®Olb, ©tllxr, Supfer. (Horn.) 9lun abet bieibet ®taube, |»ofFnung, Siebe, biefe brci. (1 Cor. xiii. 13.) ©cm 3?oI! e«tf*ans (sprang up) ncucr SKut^ unb neued S«» trauen. (E.) Slngriff unb SBibetfianb tooStte ben ganjen Sog. (Grube.) 3»ei unb jwci if* bier. But : ©totj unb ©4)i(!fal (Sm^f te« in meiner Sruft. (Sen.) ' " In thine hand ia power and might." (1 Chron. xxix, 12.) §S 362-355.] Concord and Apposition. 287 352. Subjects of different persons. The verb agrees with the worthier (1st before 2d, 2d before 3d), and is put in the plural : Su unb t(5 ftnb QlMii(^ baBongcfommen {escaped). But if opposed to one another and connected by or or nor, the verb should be singular and agree with the nearest subject : SBcbcr bu not^ i^i ^ahe eS gefejeii. er ober i^ Sin im Srrtjum. (For ti finb meine Xoi^ttt, see §§ 156, 157.) 353. Plural of Courtesy. In addressing persons of rank and in the official style, titles lilie ©eine STOajCJiat, dW} ©naben (your grace), ©cine Sur(^taUf^t (His Serene Highness), etc., take a plural verb : ©cine Surc^Iau(|)t, bet |Jerjog,ccra»)fei)le« jtc^ SKjjtnb!* ju ®nabcn unb f i^itfen S^nen. (Sch. ) . . . presents his humble respects, and sends . . . ®er ^txx 95roftbent ftagen nacfi 3^n«n. (Sch.) 354. Apposition. A person or thing is often further defined or described by the use of another noun which gener- ally follows it. The latter noun is said to be " in apposition " with the former, and is in the same case : Sa^ 8teb coin ^vinjeii Sugent'ug, bcm cicln IRittet:. The lay of Prince Eugbne, the noble knight. 355. Apposition expressed by }u. But what would be apposition in English is very commonly expressed in German by the preposition }u, corresponding to our as : fReii^e mix jum spf onb bet ottcn Jteunbfi^aft beinc SRet^tc. (G. Oive me your hand as a pledge of old friendship. 1 For (Sim. 288 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XIX. SRtt^wtn iatte men pxai^tiQtn jungen $unb ium @efii^en{ et- fatten. (EiEHL.) Eichwin has received a splendid young dog as a present. Note. — This form with ju is no doubt a dative of purpose (see § 289, 8, d) as in the construction : Su^ jn eincm neuen Sode, cloth for a -new coat. Cf. Engl. We have Abraham to our father (Luke iii. 8) ; Ae took her to wife. 356. Similar eonstructiou witli verbs. The same form, with the definite article, is used with the following verbs of naming, correspond- ing to our second accusative : nta^en, to make I ctnenneit, to appoint etHdten, to declare | ewix^tn, to elect er^ebcn, to raise, elevate.^ 2lnbrea« crflort feincn 9Ie|fen jam So^n nxtb ©rSeit feinet @fitcr(e«tates). (ScH.) ©in Stopfc |)ag ma^t ben ©egcn«tranf jum ®if t. (Sch.) A drop of haired turns the cwp of blessing into poison. @r einannte ben Bif($Df ju feinem SteUtiertteier. (B.) (representative). Note. — •Satten, to consider, has fiii with accusative, cf. English to take for: tuii- ^tetten i^n fiiv eincn Dfjtcier; sometimes also ecHarcit: 3(5 etHSrc t^n file eineit Scttugcr, / declare him to be a deceiver.^ 36^ ettldre eS fiit fnlfi^, / declare it false. 357. Apposition with Proper Names. In German, as in Latin, a proper name preceded by a common noun describing it is put in apposition : 2)og Sontgvei^ 3tolien, (he kingdom of Italy. S)te ©tabt ^anno»er, the city of Hanover. ®ie Untt)er|ttat |>etlielberg.* Sec 3lamt So^ann. [Exercises 58 and 105.] ' To this construction belongs the use of netbcn jn, to become : aJef SRenf^ ttjitb jn @tau6 (see 358, note), man turns to dust. §358.] Use of the. Cases— Nominative. 289 •Chapter XX. Use of the Cases. Nominative. 358. Verbs with the Nominative : — feiit, to he voerben, to become 1 bletten, to remain fdf)etnen, to seem |>eif en, to be called ftc^ biinfen (rare), to seem er wurbe CBeriel^rci:. Se became senior master. Scitt aSritte fc^etnfi bu nttr. (Sch.) You seem to me to be no Briton. (gin guter aSitte tft bic Bcftc aSitrjc. (G.) j4 g'ood mil is the best sauce (lit. spice). Set SWenfc^ biinft fid^ ein tltimt (Bott (W.) Man imagines himself te be a little god. ' To denote a gradual change tocrtm takes ju : Sie Seute iegriffcn nic^t wie ter groifle JJnufmann fltcr SWa^t $ttm ^iifliiiftften getoorben fei. (Riehl.) The people did not understand how the rudest merchant had become in one night the most polite. , T 290 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XX. Genitive. 359. Position of Genitive. — Except occasionally with proper names which occur either way ^ the genitive usually follows the noun it depends upon : ©(^ttterg ©ebtd^te or bt'e ©ebit^tc ©d^tfferg. ba^ ^au^ he€ ©tabtrat^^, the town councillor's house. iii SSrtefe feine^ ffiruber^. Note 1. — In poetry and an elevated style of prose the genitive is found preceding : ScineS SBatttS ^axii. (L.) The duty of silent obedience. 3n Set Smtgftau ^onb. (Sch. ) Into the maid's hand. Note 2. — An adjective follows the noun dependent upon it for the reason given in § 326 that the complement of the predicate comes last: ®rc Bdnig njor feinec S^aien ringckenl (mindful). SStetc bet @t>tai^e funbtgc ^etren. Many genilem^n (weV) acquainted with the language. 360. Genitive of Thing measured. — The names of materials, etc., measured or weighed, appear to be in ap- position, but they are really in the genitive, the termination having disappeared. Note. — This probably came about by analogy with the feminine nouns, these having no termination : cine @IIc Setnuanb, a yard of linen. tin ^funb ^\xdtx, a pound of sagar. me^rere Stfien %\tt, several chests of tea. JWei gaf S3ter, two barrels of beer. etn !£ropfen 23Iut, a drop of blood. etnc ^attie 2Bpiji, a game of whist. 1 aBie bie (Sommentitte @:afatS ift Srtiebtii^S ®ef(!$i(i^te fnitet 3cit einet la trteutentpcii S)cn!mate kct l^ipotifc^ieii Sitcratur. (Feeytag.) §§361-364.] Use of the Cases— Genitive. 291 So also : — eine 2lrt aSogel, a kind of bird. tint SOTetige Garten, a lot of cards. (also with ©orte, sorf; ©attuiig, species.) 361. But if the second noun is preceded by an adjective the endings are retained . tin ?5funt) guten Surfer?, ein ffor6 retfer Sijjfel. 362. 93ott however is used if the latter is preceded by a word like bt'efer, berfelfie, etc. : ivoti ?5funb »on btefem Z^tt, 363. Predicative Genitive. — The genitive occurs in a few expressions like an adjective as a predicate after the verbs fcin, etc. ! 3(^ Bin SBiCfenS, / am willing. S$ Kn ber SReinung, / am of opinion. So also : xtimi ^JerjenS ; frozen SKutJcS (of good cheer) ; guter Saune (in good humour) ; iiS ScbCS (a dead man) ; fetttcr 2ln)tC^t (of his view) ; nitimt ©cburt (of low Urth) ; mannli^cn ®cf(^tc^t« (of the male, sex or gender). 364 Adverbial LocutlonB In tbe Genitive gragenbcn 2lugc5, with inquiring look SrocEcncn guf e«, cZj-j^ shod. Wli$txanif(^in ©emiitjc^, of suspicious mind. gricMt^en ©^rittcS, with peaceful tread. Unbetlic^teter ©ai^e/ without having accomplished my object ' (re iTi/ecid). * %^ Hm uiwcntdjctcr ©nii^c jiiruj, / went on a futile errand. 292 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XX. ©ludlic^ct SBctfe, luckily. ®i^' bcincg Scgcg, go thy way, etc., etc. Note. — aRcineS ®tet^en, people like me; " the like of me " is elliptical : St t^ut fut bi^i unk itincS ®IeiiJgen fWniili^ SBunket. (L.) He hourly performs miracles for thee and those like thee {thy equals). (L.) 365. Genitive or t>Ott. — ^The dative with t»Ott is preferred to the Genitive : — (i) In titles : ber ^ontg SJon Statien. (2) When the governed noun is not precede^ by a word that can denote the ease : Set ®tbtanci, two of us; S^ret JWonjtg, twenty of you. (8) To denote the quality or material of anything : cin SWann son Sifen. ein ©tiff ti on SIfcnbcin, an ivory handle. Suweten (jewels) son auferorbentIt(|er ©(^(in^ett. (9) To avoid the juxtaposition of two genitives ; bet 3;ob »on bent ©o^nc.beS tutfi^erS (coac/iwan)— (not be« ©o5ne« beS fiutfc^erg). 366. Adverbial Genitive of Time. — Indejmife time is expressed by the genitive : beS 9)?orgen^, m the morning. mt€ SCageg, owe day. fetner 3^**/ *** ^''^ '*™^' na(|jier S:age, owe o/ these days. 367. But to denote a definite point of time, so that the exact day, hour, etc., when the event takes place can be named, the accusative is always used (cf. accusative, § 386). ben 10 getntar, tlie 10th of February. benfetkn Xa^, the same day. 294 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XX. 368. Adjectives with tbe Genitive : eingebenf, mindful fait, tired or sick of tnSbe, tired funbtg, acguainted with jtf^ (dat.) Bcit)u5t, conscious ma^ttg, master of, well versed in f^utbtg, guilty wurbig, K>or% and a number of others of comparatively rare occurrence except in the official style. Mnfcr Sopf iH ies ©erjenS ni^t mc$r ma^tig. (W.) our head is no longer master of our heart. aB« tfl ii(| fo f(!&tncte« S^ulb bcwuft? (Sen.) who is conscious of such heavy guilt? 369. Verbs with the Genitive : Alwags: bebutfcn, to Keed. gebenfen, to remember. fatten, to await. pfltgen, to give onesdfup to (only).^ ermangeln, to lack. Sometimes (not generally in modem German) : fi^onen, to spare ; fpotten, to mock. Hx f#Onte i^vct Srei^eit^ weit ex ifttet StStfe bcbutftc. (Sch.) Jie spared their liberties, because he needed their strength. 34) Jarre Se8 aiuSfiittt^a fiber Scben unb Sob. (Kotzkbuk) / await the verdict of life or death. Sluf meincn ©fltern Set SHu^c ju pffegcn. (Kotzebue.) to give myself up to ease on my estates. 1 $fl(3cn, in the sense of to nurse, to tend, takes the accusative. " 3^ mup tneine @efuttbgeii ft^oneit, / must spare my hedtth.^ ©tJotteii ii6er is now the common construction. 370-372.] Use of the Cases— Dative. 295 370. Reflexive Verba with the Genitive. (Read § 372, note.) ^ify anne^ntcn, to take charge of ftii^ Bebtcnen, to make use of fi6) 6cfleiftgcn, to apply oneself to ftc^ icmacjtigen, to take possession of ild) ieitnften, ) ^^ remember, re- ^^ entltnncn, J. ^^^^ 1?$ cnnnern, |tC^ Cnt^ottCtl, to abstain from jtf^ Ctbormctl, to have mercy on itci cntf^tlagcn (ber ©orgcn), to rid oneself of {cares, etc.) ftl!^ ftcuen (or ttiiX, aoc), to re- joice at it(t) tubmen, to hoast oj jtt^ WSmen, to he ashamed of 371. Verha with accusative (of person) and genitive (of thing).— Most of these correspond in construction to their English equivalents, anKagen, iefcjiutbigen, to accuse of, to tax with; ut«fu$rcn, to convict of; fcefrcten, to rid of, etc, others are : entitnben, to release from (e.g. an oaih) ctitfe|en (be« %%xmti), to de- Ctltjefien, to exempt from (e.g. the trouble) tntWOJnen, to wean from WUVbtgen, to favour with Scmanb bcS SanbcS Bcmcifcn, to banish from the country. Semanb ctneS SSefTctn bctcjrcn, tlierf))te(^en, to contradict Wti>iXfli^en, to resist jurufen, to call to JU^Orcn, to listen to ilVOOxiommen, to anticipate For how to express the passive of these verbs see § 214. 375, Dative and Accusative In German. We subjoin some of the commonest verbs which take the dative and accusative in German, but have a different construction in English : anf e'^en, to see by; baS fc^e t$ S^nett an, / see it by your looh. au^Xtsttt, to impose on; xij lege i^nt *te Soft (burdm) auf. auf irageit, to commission with; i(^ trage S^nett bic 9{it8f ii^rnng (execution) auf. einf(af;en, to inspire with, er f!6?te mix SSertrauen ein (confidence). enigelten and bergelien, to ^ay (i.e. atone) for ; ber $age foU rail's entgclten. (Kotzbbue.) %\tn, to believe of; \i) gtaube e8 t^m nii^t, I do not believe it of him. lo^nen, to reward; tiaS lo^ne S^tten ®Ott! f^enten, to present with; iij f^etllte Sem ®efangeiten (prisoner) Die Svei^eit. tierbenlen, to blame for; bai lann i(^ SJnen nt(^t Setbcnfen. §§ 376-378.] Use of the Cases— Dative. 299 bexge&en, to forgive for ; \6) ijergcte betncm jungctt Stutc bicS lei^tjinntge SOSo^tWOtten (G.), / forgive your young blood for this frivolous wish, tietfel^en, to be aware of; c§c i(^ ttttr'^ Bcrfa^, before I was aware of it. betiettien, to pardon; tc^ ftctjei^e btr'^ (G.), I pardon you for it. borwtvfen, to reproach for ; i(^ worf ijm fcttlC Unbatlfbatfctt [ingratiiude) UOr. 376. Adjectives witli the Dative. — The same idea as that referred to in the latter part of § 372 obtains with these adjectives, as each is capable of being split up into a verb and noun (in the accusative) thus : ajnli^=a!^nttc^feit§a'benb. Hence o^ntt^ takes the dative. Most of these adjectives have the same construction in both languages. The principal exceptions are : groufam, cruel f«"""^*l;fci«<^ taub, deaf JofltcJ polite gutig, gtctd^gultig, indifferent ^ which all take geflen. (See § 297, To.') ©ie ©tabt Tie^t einetn Selbe a^nti^. (G.) The town looks like afield. Saub gegcnatteSSttten, Deaf to all entreaties. Sn. The dative after adjectives is frequently the Dative of Advantage, expressed in English hy for, see § 380 . di ifi mix unmogtit^, it is impossible for me. 378. Reflexive Verbs with the Dative.— As in English, a great many verbs, whether governing dative or accusative, can be used reflexively when the personal object is the same person as the subject. Hence we often find the reflexive pronoun in the dative, e.g. : he praises his pupil, ex lobt feitlCn ©C^iitet ; he praises himself , er lebt fi«. I flatter the lady, i^ f(^mcf$te ber Same; I flatter myself, ic^ fc^meic^te miv. I take the liberty, i^ ite^^me mil bte %Xii^iit. or i^ crlaube tnif. 1 With the construction reversed : / am indifereni to him, n i^ mtt gteii^guttia. 3.00 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XX. Many, besides the reflexive pronoun in the dative, require an object in the accusative, e.g. : aufibttten : iS) titte mij: SK»Se a\Xi, I beg for quiet. Such are : it(5 atintflpCtt, to arrogate to oneself fic^ etnbilben, to imagine ft$ BOrneJmcn, to propose to oneself Ung fi^etten. (Koenek.) / may not call myself (in a bad sense) the, favourite of fortune. Sr fragt ben Si^utei; bit Stegeln. (From Sandeks.) He asks the pupil the rules, Sule^i^tt StansBftfi?. You teach him French. For the English second accusative expressed by ju, see § 356. Note. — To ask a question is etwoS firagen, or einc Stage jitacn (on, accusa- tive) : 2c^ fcage btc^ ettvaS, ii^ fiede Ant Stage an @ie. 389. Passive of Verbs of Naming, etc. With verbs of naming, both accusatives become nominatives — one the subject, the other the predicate : bic 3»uitf gete^rt. He is taught music. S^^oBeTnit mittJetUn lafTcn wai ben <»erfif(6e« S«oSen gde^rtwirb. (Ebbbs.) / have inquired (had myself informed) what the Persiam. boys are taught. 390. Cognate Accusative. Some intransitive verbs are followed by an accusative object expressing in the form of a substantive the same idea as the verb, and intensifying it, e.g. -. eincn ®$Iof Wtafen, einc S^at t^un 3c& ^abt etnett Garten Bamp^ geMmpft. (Sch.) / have fought a hard fight. St jtorb etnen aieitctatoS. (G.) He died the death of a horseman. 'Siai 8e6e«,bo« i^ UVA^ fetn @efc(ienf. (L.) The life I live is a gift from him. (J 306 Rules of Syntax. [C!hap. 391. AccosatlTe with Adjectives. Properly speaking, no adjective can govern an accusative, but in modem German, possibly becainse the verb and adjectave^a transitive verb [e.g. getva^t ttXttien^getVfi^ien), this construction is sometimes found : 3i$ fonnte itu mann ni^t Id^ tverben. / could not get rid of the, man. ®ie ©(^one wurbe i^een Sieg gewajr. (W.) The fair one perceived her victory. Note, — ORube, fatt, and utectiiruflts {tired of) should take the genitive. It is further justifiable with an indefinite neuter expression like e$, bag: 2Ba5rti(^ i^ fliouic i(^ war' eS jufrieben. (L.) Verily, I think I should be content with it. (or. . . batnit jufrieben.) 3^ bin es jufrieben. (G.) 3>a8 bin ti$ nic^t gewolint. / am not accustomed to that. Note. — i8al( appears to take an accusative, as it is usual to say: ctn Soffet voK @alj, eine 5Iafi|e voQ @ffig/ but this is really the genitive of which the termination has been dropped (see § 360). When the noun is accompanied by an attributive word, the full form is used : Sin Sap [cash) voQ e^ttn fSitlnei. Sin Sti»pf wU ^onitttmet @infa)Ie. . . . full of strange ideas. Sr !e|tte mit rincm Jttuge uotl frifr^ett SESaffete jucud . (P. Hetse.) He returned with a jug full of fresh water. § 392.] Use of the Cases— Accusative. 307 392. Accusative and Infinitive.— The sentence, "I know him to be an honest man," may be split up into two separate sentences : " he is an honest man " and " I know (this fact). " Hence the subject of the verb "to be" is him, and the sentence may also be expressed as fol- lows : / know that he is an honest man. The " accusative and infinitive " construction is unknown in German, and must be changed into a subordinate sentence : 3l^ tveif, iafi et eitt e^clid^ei! Wtann ift. So also : / wish you to go. Something similar are constructions like the following : / told him to take a piece. 3l$ fagte i$m, iafi et ein Sma ne^men fante.^ Permit me to paint him. @ef)aite baft iiQ i^n malcn batf. (W.) For Verbs with accusative and genitive, see § 371. [Exercises 61 and 108.] ' Notice here : i^ fagc er foB, / tell him to; i(^ Sat i^n n miii^tt, I begged him to. 308 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XXI. Chapter XXI. The Seven Auxiliaries of Mood. 393. Infinitive for Perfect Participle. — When the perfect tenses of these verbs are used in connection with a principal verb, this being in the infinitive {I have been-able to COtne), their perfect participle is attracted into this mood ; Ihave heenraUe=\i) Ipafce gefotlttt. I have heen-ahle to come=i0) ^abi fommetl fijnnen (not ■ gefonnt). J&a6' tc^ benn e^tx Wteberfommen twoHen?— unb wieberlommen lijttttcn? (L.) Save I then wished to return sooner ? — have I been able (to return) ? ©aS ^fnb \)(xt wetnen ntiiffen. The child has had-to cry. |)otte er ti^n tabein biirfett? Sad he dared to blame him ? 394. I. ^onnen. (a) I can, I am able : Sag ^tnb tann 3e|>en, the child can-walk. (J) Permission — / can, I may : @te fSnnen bic ^dlfte nepmen, you may take half. (c) / may (possibly) : dv fann ^eute fomtnen, he may possibly come to-day. §395.] The Seven Auxiliaries of IViood. 309 {d) Speiaal meaiiiiig-: I know (a language, lesson, etc.) : tx iann ®tk(^i^(^, he knows Greek. Note. — I could (indicative, i.e. =was-ahle) is \Sj fontite. I could (conditional, i.e. = should he-able) is 'v3) tonnte. He could-not hear me this morning, . . . rc tonnte. He could hear me if he liked, . . . et (Hnnte. 395. 2. mi^tv. (a) I Tnay, in a very general sense, i.e. I am at liberty to : (St'e mogen fagen wag fetn. He is said to he blind of one eye. 9\i«n btefe SSitber ferttg fe»n? Are these pietv/res supposed to be finished? (i.e. Do you say they are ?) {d) A promise : ©u f *H# e{n ©jcmplor bc3 S5u(^cd Jo6cn. yoM shall have a copy of the booh. («) 3^ fotttC (imperfect subjiiiictive for conditional, see § 408) = / ought to : @t f oKte f^on ^tx fcin, he ought to be here now. (/) In the imperfect subjunctive, it is to be expected that : SRic in tin SBort meinen iiptftn entflc^re, unb wit fonte tS au^? (Fb.) Never has a word escaped my lips, and how could it be ex- pected to ? SESic f oote tc^ ba« wontcnte ©cmeinwefcn fcficn ?»etfcn'# (Riehl.) Hme could I be expected to help to strengthen the tottering com- monwealth ? 312 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XXI, 399. 6. fSioUtn. (a) IvMl, 1 arrirtvUlmg, I wish,{I Kke, I please, I choose:) 3^ toilf bte ©ac^c ixUtm^mcn, I win take charge of the affair. Sr ge^t ani fo oft aU er Will. He goes out as often as he wishes {likes, pleases, chooses). SBenn @te nttc^ mttne^men tooKien. If you would take me with you. (J) Hence the meaning, I am-going-to, I am-ahout-to, because the will of the doer is implied : ©te ttionte eine anbere Unterrebung anfangett. (Im.) She was about to begin another conversation. ©ic ^abtn tntd^-nic^t au^reben laffen, i(^ fttoOte fagen. (L.) Yon have not allowed me to finish (speaking), I was going to say. (c) Special meaning, I pretend, I say I have : Set (Sine woHte langfi bcja^It ^ahen. (hi.) One pretended to have {said he had) paid long ago. 3il ct beldbigt, bet Tiaxm bcr mcin gieunb fetn wia? (L.) Is he offended, the man who pretends to be my friend? {d) I wish, followed by the subjunctive =i(]^ tVOHie : 3$ t»oute (or ttiinfc^tc) ii^ wore ni^t Wc- I wotUd I were not here. 3i$ tvoate, t($ fonnte eu($ wiberfpief^en. (G.) I wish I could contradict you. Note. — SBit Viiitien=let us: Sffiir woatn aiisfajren, IteScr 3noiot, kie ©taM tin toenig ju Sefe^n. (L.) Let its drive out. Major,, to inject the town a little. §'400.] The Seven Auxiliaries of Mood. 313 400. 7. Saffcn. (a) Ilet: @ie licffCtt mtc^ titc^t liinetnge'^en. They did not let me go in. S«ffctt ©te un^ bt'e Strd^e tefe^en. (Im.) Let us inspect the church. (J) Heave: @r Iteft feinen Stegenfc^irm in beic Sde iie|ien. Sis left his umbrella standing in the owner. (c) I cause, I get or have (done), I order, I make (French- Zaire) : gt lic^ tie ©tabt an me'^reven £)rten anjilnben. (E.) He ordered the town to he set fire to in several places. 3c^ werbe anfpannen laffctt, (Son.) / shall haue the horses put-to. 3c^ tieff ben ^naben ben ^oxi brtngen. / made the boy bring the basket. {d) Eeflexivdy, with an active infinitive, when in English followed by a passive infinitive, = can he, is to he ; ©as iSftt fi* ni^t wtberlegen. That cannot be refuted. Set JiofWuIjc lieft ft(^ nii^t irrcn. (Im.) The village magistrate was not to be led astray. So also : di iSftt fi* §ter Beffcr f^Iafen. This is a better place for sleeping. §icr iSfit (e8) m ouSru^en. This is the place to rest, etc. 314 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XXl- (SBltttineKi) : ®s wart ttoroug Dcrfprot^cn ba? fetncr bet UnglurfSfaffc (accidents), tie ftc^ babci eteigncn {happen) iStmtett, mtr ju ©^ulben fommen {be put dmm to me) foUe. (Set Jtiting): Ste ItfJ^ babei eretgncn— Ipmrien, fagcn ©ie, ober foHten? (L., Em. Gal. iv. l.j 401. Used EUiptlcally. An elliptical use of these verba is very common, an infinitive being underBtood : 3$ muft in bie Stxxi^t (i.e, gejen). (G.) / must go to church. Sir >«tften eg ni^t (i.e. tjun). ?Fe might not do so. SSat' flltcS fon|l nur roie c« mitftte. (L.) Would that all dse were as it ought to be ! Sartja maftte Dor bcm Slufbrud^e bcfTetbcn no$ SaSjrfon jurild. (Ebees.) B. had to go bach to B. before the disbamding of it Ifiefore it, i.e. the army, disbaTuied). So i(| ni^t t^un barf wai t# mo^te, fonncn jietni^ bc$ benfen unb ftngen laffcn WoS i^ toiB. (G.) Even with an accusative object governed by the infinitive under- stood : 3i5 wcif tiic^t tt>te mctn Satcr eS lonnte (i.e. eg t^un lonnte). (G.) / hum not how my father could do so. QoUtn used elliptically =w%af means ? SagfottbieferSarm? What is the meaning of this noise? §402.] The Seven Auxiliaries of IVIood. 315 402. Could bare, etc. There is a compound form of these verbs which at first sight appears to differ fronr the English : / could have spoie»=it6 ^citte fprci^en fiinticn (j'auraia puparUr), but the difference is only apparent, and can be explained by § 393 and by the use of the imperfect subjunctive for conditional (§ 408), e.g. : / ccyaM have spoiken=I shovld-have (^citte, § 408) been-aible (gclonnt, but, after another infinitive, lonncn, § 393) to speah =i^ Sotte rebcn lonncn. I should (i.e. ought-to) have asked, i(^ Yattt fragcn foUen.^ 3(5 $attc ite nut g(ei$ ntitncjmen bittfcn. (L.) I might have tahea them viith me at the time. 3$ Jofte baS Sitb fe^en mogcn. / should have liked to see the picture. ®te fatten ti Itxtxti gcjicrn crjalten fotten. (L.) Tou ought to have received it yesterday. 3($ 5att« o6rctfcn mitfTen, HJenn, etc. I must have left (i.e. should-have been-ohliged-io leave) if . . ,' 3(5 ptte gcjcn njottcn. /should-have liked to go. [Exercises 62 and 109.] 1 @ie foUte m(^t otletn gegangen fein (L.)=8Ae was not to have gone alone, where foUte is indicative. 2 In the same way, he must have left yesterday, where must is present indicative, U is necessary (inferring from the circumstances) tliat he has gone = a mu{l gepcrn oigetetfi fein. 316 Rules of Syntax. [Chap, tvtt Chapter XXII. Use of the Tenses. 403. Progressive Form. The progressive form, I am reading, I was speaking, etc., does not exist in German, and can only be expressed by the addition of the adverbs ebett, gevabe, f^Ott, to the corresponding tenses : (£r ^pta^ thtti »om ^rteg, aU iH) l^ereratrat. He was speaking of the wat, when I entered. 3^ tvattete fii^on auf ©te. / was waiting for you. 404. Present for Future. More commonly perhaps than in English, the present tense is nsed to denote a future act. It speaks 'vrith more decision and emphasis than the future : 3$ seife morgcn nai^ SESten ah. I leave to-morrow far Vienna, ®iM SOSort fiit taufetib : S^r nttteririjiiet bte ncuc gejre ni$f. (G.) You will not suppress the nmo doctrines. STOorgen ift jte meine gtou. (L.) To-morrow she wiU be my wife. Sometimes with imperative force : ^orc, SatI, bu aejft foglci^ in bic ©cjule. Do you hear, Charles, you {voill) go to school at once. §§405,406.] Use of the Tenses. 317 405. Historic Present. The Germans constantly employ this tense in narrating occurrences in an exciting or impressive manner : ©cnftn ©ie [i^, i(^ stDe faum ffltif ©i^ritte, ba fe^e ii^ mm 3»ann ittit SlifcSf^neKe ou^ bem ®cbiif(| Iperborfptingen. Just think, I had sca/rcely gone five paces when I saw a man jump with lightning speed out of the thicket. Srmfibet wi«f t tx jtc^ auf ctnen SRafen nicbcr, ■ Sie^t ungcril^rt bie reijenbe 9Jotur ©0 f^5n in t§rer Sinfalt! iftBtt bie Siebcr Set JJat^tigaU ... (W.) Wearied he flings himself upon the turf, beholds unmoved the charms of Nature, so beautiful in Jier simplicity, hears the songs of the nightingale. 406. Present of Incomplete Action. When an action which has been going on for some time is still going on, the Germans use respectively the present and imperfect, where we should use the perfect and pluperfect. (N.£. — The English perfect is in reality a present tense.) 3c& UU fc^on 4 TlomU in Sre^ben. I have been liuing m Dresden for 4 months^ {and am stUl there). ©r JeBte fd^on 4 Sa^re in S., ali . . . He had been liuing 4 years in D., when . . . ©eit tuann finb wix benit 33ruber? fvagte ic^ ben fioifer, (Gkube.) How long have we been hrothers ? . . . 3wotf 3a^re f(|>on baucttc ber Srteg. (Sch.) The war had lasted for 12 years. • 3^ 5aie 4 3Ronate in 33. gewol^nt would mean : / lived i months in D., and am no longer living there. 318 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XXIL (Cf. French : il y a i mois que je demeure id; and Latin; jamdudum soribo, 1 ha/ve now leen wrUing.y Note. — There is a colloquial use of the present where we should use a perfect : / have come to fetch my picture. 3§ lomnte mein Silt ju fjAm. 407. Imperfect. This tense can always be used to translate the English imperfect, though when the action is recent, the perfect is perhaps more usual in German : ^ Oepern i^abtn toix ben Slbenb 6ei aWMer^ jugetrodpt. We spent last evening at the Midlers'. SBag ^af>en ©te bovt gemad^t? What did you do there ? This is pre-eminently the case in questions : 2Bic §at cS S^mxi in Sctlin gefatten ? (not gcfiel cS.) How did you like Berlin ? 408. Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. — These tenses are in constant use for the Present and Past Con- ditional : (gg tworc »tel fieffet, t»enn tx fd^wiege (for eg wilrbe »iel beffer fein). It would he much better for him to be silent. ^^ ^Sttc eg ntc^t getftan (for ic^ wurbe eg nidpt get^oti ^oten), 3(| ttiiinfj^tc (cf. § 399, d), UtU ©c&weftertt, i^x ginsei in unfer Stminer. (Kotzebue.) / wish, dear sisters, you would go to our room. ^ There is a trace of this in English : /, thy servant, fear the Lord from my youth. (1 Kings xviii. 12.) ^ Hence the common mistake of foreigners in saying : / haue gone to your house yesterday. ^ 409-412.] Use of the Tenses. 319 409. Future of Doubt. — This tense may be used, as occasionally in English, to express probability or uncertainty, the adverb too^l (per- cJiance) being sometimes inserted : No doubt you have heard. & ifi etn miitx SBeg, cr hiits mojl fe^r miibe fei«. It is a long way, I daresay he is (wiU be) very tired. 410. Omission of Auzillaxy. — For the sake of brevity or euphony the auxiliary verbs Jabeit, fcitt, and Wetbetl are frequently omitted in a dependent sentence (i.e. when they would come at the end) : ©er SotiDurf, tap tifi mt$ S^rcr SSerferct^en tjcitjafttg gemac^t (supply Jobe), weit ie^ baju gcf^wiegen (supply ^abt), mog mi(^ bet S^nen entf^utbigcn. (L.) ire< the reproach that I have made myself a participator in your crimes, because I have been silent about them, be my excuse. 9la$t>ott Ite einen p^tigcn Sliif um jt(5 Jcrgctsorfen (supply iattt), ging fie i^xei SBcgeS fort. (P. Heysb.) Having cast a hasty glance around her, she went on her way. Note. — This is particularly the case to avoid the clashing of similar words : S>ex •6ctr, iec ge|in:n aBgcreifi (ifi), ijl in ©o^n tcS Stbuotnten St. ZiS J{int>, totXifet nttt beinem SSetter gcf))teU (^ai), ^at lie Sflaftm. 411. Omission of tnrotten. — In the future and conditional of the passive voice the tutt'ben is frequently omitted for brevity's sake : ©obotb tie gflrjlen eingctrctcn ffnb, wirb icbcr Sugana juin ^alaii 6efe|t (properly befegt wertcn). (G.) every approach to the paia^x will be occupied. ffienn @ie fcrttg jtnb, witb bet Sif$ abgeberft (i.e. njetbeti). When you have done, the table will be cleared. 412. A common AuziUary. — When two or more verbs have the same auxiliary, it stands in a principal sentence before the first, in a sub- ordinate after the last : 3^ Wbt gelebt unb gctitten. SBeit ic& gelebt unb griitten jo»e (not Weil i(^ gelebt ^cAt unb gelitten). [Exerdses 63 and llO.] 330 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XXm Chapter XXIII. Use of the Moods. 413. Subjunctive. — The indicative is used to express a statement of fact or what the speaker believes to be such, whereas the subjunctive denotes only what can be conceived in the mind as possible or probable under certain conditions. Hence the subjunctive is used in the "oratio obliqua," Le. when we quote the statement or opinion of another, as the speaker does not vouch for the facts, but, gives them on the responsibility of the person quoted. The subjunctive is thus used after verbs, substantives, or adjectives, expressing to thirJe, hdieve, dovbt/ say, assert; hope, fear; permU, wish, command, beg, advise ; and expressions like e^ iji ntpglt^, etc. (i) 3et)et glauttc, ber SBefe^l Everybody belieued the order gcl^C i^tl attein an. (G.) concerned him alone.- (2) @rlaul>en@te,ba9 td^ bog Permit me to count out the @elb OUfjitl^Ie. (L.) money. (3) ©Ud^et auf ber ©tra^e, " Seek in the broad places, if ye oi i^V ^emanb finbet, can find a man, if there be bet ffte^t t^ntf unb any that" (perchance) " exe- na^ bem Olauten cuteth judgment, that seekelh fxage. (LuTHEE.) the truth." (Jee. v. 1.) (4) S)te ganje Strafe Hef The whole street ran to the an'g jjenjier, um ju mndow to see who would fe^en wev benn enblt(i^ at length come off victor. getvmne. (Eiehl.) §414.] Use-of the Moods. 321 414. No hard and fast rule can be laid down for the use of the subjunctive, for frequently the same verb is followed by either mood, according as certainty or uncertainty prevails in the mind of the speaker,^ e.g. : aKon fiitii^tete, baf biefe Unternepmung ntiggludcn tt*evbe. (K) It was feared that this enterprise would faU. 3d^ fuxii^te, eg ttitrb m6)i werben, wit er benft. (G.) I fear it wUl not he as he thinks. 3d^ pat>e ft^on geprt ba§ ein geuer am 5Rot{)^au« auggebvo^en tft. (Ji! is a/ae< •) Let no one injure the enemy ! ®ott beriei^e "axx langes Sebcn! God grant thee a long life ! O ba@ t$ ein Seib miice! (6.) Would that I were a woman ! Oefcgnct f elf* bu mix, ©eburWfag meincS ®luds ! (W.) Blessed be thou, birtlulay of my happiness/ 416. Indirect Narration (Oratio Obliq'ua).— It often hap- pens that the speaker gives the sense or substance of his own or another's words or thoughts without actually quoting them word for word as they were spoken, e.g. : He told me he had read my novel. His exact words were : / have read your novel. The repetition of the substance of another's words or thoughts is called in German ^nbttefie IRebe {Indirect Speech, or Oratio Obligm). In the German ^niixttU 9tebe the verb must be in the suhjtmctive mood : @r fagte tntt; er ^atte metnen Sioman gelefen. Wlaxi Q\aubt, fte entftnringe bem @tatnme Ut 3lma< gonen. (G.) It is believed she sprang frmn the race of Amazons. §§417-419.] Use of the Moods. 323 3)ian buifte fvagen, luoper td^ toiffe, ba^ btefer SKeifiet eine SSilbfdute be^ Wiottet gemar^t l^aBc. (L.) / might be asked how I knew that this master rnade a statue of Ph. ©r erflcirte, er f'onntt ntd^t wetter. He declared he could go no fwrther. S?(d ber ©eneral nic^t erjci^W, ba^ bte ©tabt in 2 Sagen etngenommen tvate ? i)i(i «oif eifel, ob man bie ©tabt iecinnc^mentoeKbe. (R.) CansiderMe dotibta now arose in the minds c^mamy as to whether the town would ever be taken. 418. Sequence of tenses is not rigidly observed in German Oratio ObUqua. That tense is preferred which differs in form from the indica- . live. Hence, as the present tense of all regular verbs has more distinct forms than the imperfect, it is of more frequent use. ®r fagtc mix bag cr tin fot^es fSnfa^ttn mifeSiBifle is better than . . . ntipbitttgte, he told me he disapproved of such a proceeding. ' When the choice cannot be decided in this way there is always a tendency to use the tense of the speaker, 419. One thing should further be noticed : namely, that an imperfect in the indirect narration should not depend upon a present tense. Use instead the perfect. Not : «x fagt, fein gteunb Ugltiteit tjn uhnaU but : (« fagt, fein greunb ^afn i^n ixbtxaU begleitet 324 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XZm. jTAe universal vote accused him of having postponed the general welfare to his oum private 420. Farther examples : — (1) S)te aKgemeine @ttmme flagie ijn an: bog n fiber feinen 9t{t)atnu^en bad aUgemeine Sefie i^tntangefe^t ^aie. (SCH.) (2) SBcnn mon fagtc: bet fiunfilcr a^me bent Siic^tet, ober bet S^i^tet a^me bent Sunfllet nai^, fo !ann btefeg jwetetlei 6ebcuten. (L.) (3) ^etjog ©ottfrteb fleDte t^m »or, sereinjelt wfiffe cr ben ©tie^cn untetttegen, unb ^ulfgntannft^aft iBnne man beim 9)?anget an ©cbiffen unni6gli(5 oud Slften ^etbet- fu^ten. (R.) 4) t before tjun. 326 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. ZXm. Note. — In Oratio Ohligva the verb in a subordinate sentence is usually in the subjunctive. Only if a clause comes in rather as an interpolation of the "direct" speaker, do we occasionally find the indicative : Sine 33efa$ung, meint ee, fete- bem SSutgec auf bent 9ta^en la^et, tiecHtte ii^m, etc. (6.) 422. Subjunctive with Conjunctions. — The only conjunc- tion invariably followed by the subjunctive is batttit, m order that (and its negative, batttit . . . tlil^t, lest) : St foK ftd^ 6eetlen, bamit et ni^t ju fpat fonttne; He must hwry test he come too late. 9S8etttt has a subjunctive following only when implying a condition : If I were rich. Sag Se6en va'dxt tin ewtgeS SSetWuten, wenn bie Stc^tfunji ntd&t ftJorc, (Bokne.) lAfe would he an endless bleeding away hvi for poetry. But if it introduces a, fact, as above (§ 421, Ex. 2) : SBenn bte ?5ferbe tm uotten SRennen fvaten ; When the horses were at full gallop; the. indicative is found. [Exercises 64, 111, aM 112.] 423. Imperative. — Properly speaking, the imperative has only two persons — 2d singular and 2d plv/ral : f4)ret6e, write (thou) i f^rtttt (polite form : f^rcitcn ©ie), wrik (ye). §§424,425.] Use of the Moods. 327 The other persons are supplied from the present subjunctive or formed with the help of the auxiliaries of mood ; fotlen, IttOgen, laffen : Suet' etner auf unb jeuge 1 (G.) Let one stand forth and testify ! Scr ^6nig f li^eeifte einen ©enetata^atbon anS. Let the Mng draw up a general amnesty. etei^en wit tin Wenig HtH. (Voss.) Let us stand still a little. Stin ftonjoltW Slut f on flief en ! (Son.) Let no French blood flow I Note. — The pronoun may be expressed as in English : ge?' bu naS) 5a«fe, do you go home. Let us, when a proposal is made, =n)tr woKen. aCBlK tooDen fpajieren ge^en, let us go far a waZk. (Interrogatively: toollen Wit i^n iDccfen ? shall we wake him?) 424. Perfect Participle for Imperative. — In short commands the per- fect participle is used for the imperative : 9lt(5f flewelw*! no crying! 3li(6t ju biel 06|l segcff en ! don't eat too much fruit t ©ie 2lrme in bie fjoje ge^altctt ! hold your arms up! grif$ beinen ^5fcit flefafit! (Zbdlitz.) quielc, seize your arrow! Sttl^t.long flef eiett, friW ! (Soh.) tarry not too long, quick! (lit. make not long holiday!) 425. Infinitive for Imperative.— The infinitive is often used by ellipsis for the imperative, especially in short commands given in a hurry : fjinfitftfpringcn ! (shorter than fpringen ©ie $mu6cr), jump across ! 9lt#t JU longe bleiben ! don't stay too long! ©^neQ ma(^en ! make haste ! (Elliptical for i* bitte ©ie (befe^Ie S^nen) Hniiber ju fpringen). It is less peremptory than the perfect participle (§ 424). 328 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XXm 428. Present Indicative for Imperative. — This also occurs : |)tet untet btefen SBaumen fe|t tnt($ ntebet, Unb i^t teatit eui$ in bte @$Iai$t ;urM. (Sch.) Bere among these trees set me doum, and do you go iach to tht bOftUe. iS^c f olget mtr mtt euetm $unbe jum ®iafen. (Riehl.) Do you follow me vnth your dog to the count. The Infinitive. 427. Infinitive with 511. — Dependent upon a noun, ad- jective, the prepositions o^nt and attftatt, and most verbs, the infinitive is preceded by )U as in English. Note . — This ju comes : (a) before a simple infinitive : i^ VBunr(fie ben Sn^nlt ju etftSten. (6) before the infinitive auxiliary : iai aSectangcn getoBt ju fein . . I^oten JU fonncn . : BeiKK^ti^tigt tvoiticn jn fein. (c) between the verb and prefix of a compound : auSjufc^tagen. Ser S3erfud&, @te p ubericugen. The attempt to ammnce you. 3(^ war neugterig gu wifTen. / was mrnous to know. D^ne me^r gu scriangen. Without askmg more. 3^ fioffc, @te hatb m fe^en. I hope to see you soon. Note. — In so ... as to, the as is omitted : Be so good as to send me, feien @ie fo gut, mtt ju f^idtn. 1428,429.] Use of the Moods. 329 428. Urn . . . iu, — To express a purpose Ultl . . . JU may be used : 3(^ fomme, urn ttWai JU fragen, l have come to ash something. It is also found after the adverbs ju and genng ; but may be omitted : 3u gtof jt(^ 8» fteltagen, ju Wetfe it$ ju fsea'n. (W.) Top great to complain, too wise to rejoice. 34 (in JU furii^tfam, nm @te gu begleiten. / am too timid to accompany you. 34 bin in @taategefi!^aften alt gcnug uw gu tuiffen. (G.) / am old enough in politics to know. Note. — Instead of the infinitive with jii, a comnmnd may be ex- pressed by a subordinate sentence strengthened by the auxiliary fotten, and a request in the same manner by mogen or tutfen : SiS) tefa^l i^m, ex foHte auf^orcn. / ordered Mm to stop. ©eflottc baf t(^ t^n maten 'bax^. (W.) Permit me to paint him. 429. Infinitive without ju. (fl) 3tt is constantly omitted before an infinitive or an infinitival clause used as a subject, especially in aphorisms, proverbs, and the like : Swen tji ntenfc^tt(|i. To err is human. 3ti6)t cciett tfi Beffer (x\i fii^Ied^t rebett. It is better not to speak at all than to speak ill. 2)em ^immet tji fieten twoHen ani) 6cten. (L.) In the eyes of heaven the mil to pray is really praying. ITote. — Hence, a& opinions may differ as to what is sufficiently short and pithy to justify the omission of ju, both forms are found : Swac ifi eS \e^m . . . . . . fi(^ kec ttSgen fSh\\f entgiel^en, (gefa^tcn fniJ^ett, trine flie^ett. (W.) In truth it is a fine thing to renounce all idle repose, to seek dangers, to flee from none. ®uf ift't unb el^tenuoll fiic'S aSatecIanb gn fietitn It is a sweet and honourable thing to die for one's cowntry. 330 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. ZXm. It is farther omitted : — (b) After the auxiliaries of mood : fonneit, mo^ttt, tuifen, tnuffen, tvoKen, foKen; (afen : (Sx barf fffielen, he may play. @te foUten onfftel^en, you ought to get up. (e) After the following verbs : fe^en, ffi^Ien, ^oren lel^ren, lenten Jctf en, ^elfen, Mei6en ftnben, ma^en, nennen. 3(^ fe^e t^n f ommen. J see Aim coming. fkx leftrtc mt^ lcfc». He taught me to read. S)a^ nennfi bu athtiitn. Ton eail that igorking, Sr Mteb am Ufet gonj getaffen ftel^en. (W.) He remained staridijig quite quietly on the hank. 3^ mug miffy ol^ne Sebtenten Bel^elf en lernen. (L.) / mtttmiet1)en. This house is to he let. es Meibt cin Sapitel SuriiSsttne^men. TAere remains another chapter to be gone through. 434. GenindlTe. — The above construction with feiit may be changed into a gerundive as follows : ein ®teignt§ wtX^ti ju betaitcrn ijl jl»i ewraJ which is to be regretted becomes : ®in JU beboueinbc^ ©tctgnif an event to be regretted. Similarly : 3u ieliraiCnbe SBctbrCI^Ctl crimes to he punished Sie JU entWirtcnlien Snotcn the knots to be disentangled. 435. Elliptical: "Wiat to do," etc. — English elliptical sentences like "I don't know whM to do," etc., are translated by complete subordinate sentences with the auxiliary fotteil. 3^ wet^ nic^t was i^) t^un fott, . . . what to do. . . . WO^in i(^ Qt^in foti, . . . where to go. ... wii id) onfangen fotI, . . . how to begin. . . . warn i^ aBreifen fott, . . . when to start. (£r wufte nit^t aa^ ctanfangcn foffte. He did not know what to set ahout. Note. — ^We may here notice another ellipsis not admissible in German : when young, aW icjji (er, etc. ) jung tijav ; while in Italy, itjd^iemi KO) (ec, etc.) in Statim toac. 331 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. ZXm. 436. Verbal Noun. — In German the infinitive is used as a verbal noun, and is of the neuter gender : bai 9tetten, riding; bag Sluftaben, loading. 3c^ ^affe bag ewtgc ^tai^tcn. I hate ceaseless bragging. It being to all intents and purposes a substantive, its object will be in the genitive : S)(t3 3tbf^teiBen beg ^efteS na^m fec^g @tunben in 2lnfpru(|» 2%e copying of the pamphlet occupied sm hours. Sad ^eitcUn bev SSJiefe ifl bei 10 SUJarf @trafe »ertoten. Ji & forbidden to trespass on the fidd on penalty of 10 marks.^ Note. — This power of forming verbal nouns is very freely — indeed sometimes too freely — resorted to : 3)a8 Stijiankc^attcn, the Jieeping in order. iDa« Sneiitonktrntcfc^meljen tier Sonc, t?ie commingling of sounds. [Exercises 65 and 113.] ^ Hence there are two ways of translating a sentence like : Beading good books is salutary, according as Reading is treated as a verbal noun or as an infinitive subject (§ 429), i,e. : bat Sefen gutct Biija if) l^eilfam or gute Sfld^ec lefen ifi l^eilfam. ' §437.] The Participles. 335 Chapter XXIV. The Participles. 437. Present Participle. The German present participle can be used : (a) Attributively: SDer ftevBenbe ^elb. The dying hero. ©n fte!^enbe§ J£>eer. (Fr.) A standing army. 3une:^menbe Unru^en. Increasing distwhances. {f>) Only in a few instances as a complement to the verbs to he, to remain, etc. : ©eiii ©eft^t ifl tlagcnb obet ntii^t fd^teienb. (Winckblmakn.) His face is complaining, hui not crying. Here the participle has almost become an adjective, and may be declined and compared as such : etn llogcnbea @c(t*t ein Hagenberea ©eji^t, etc. Many present participles have, in fact, quite taken their places as adjectives, and are of common use as such, e.g. : einnebmenb, captivating ermfibenb, tiring leibenb, unwell retjenb, charming f^Iagenb/ atriMng (to the mind) aufatlcnb, striking (to the eye) iieffenb,^m&2e (remarks, etc.) nnitx^alttnb, entertaining. 336 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XXIV. (c) As complement to a verb, and almost equivalent to a separate sentence : Sant ttnStttfenS prjte tx herein (=inbctft er taut ou^rief). Crying oiU alovd he rusJted in. @te ging na$ bent Zalt ber Wlafil i)alh iauttlni iae lange Simmer auf unb nteber. (P. Heysb.) She went up and down the long room, half tripping as it were, in time with the music. (d) As an adverb, in a few instances : fo^enb ^ti^ boiling hot biennenb rotj faring red entjudenb f($on bewitehingly beautifiil blenbenb tvei^ dazzUng white. (e) Not nearly so frequently as in English is it used with adjuncts as the enlargement of a noun : ^kxi€, fittrii^tenb ba^ ber Slnfc^etn ganjltd^er SEe^r* Icjtgfeit ben Utermut^ ber granfen noi^ er^o{»en burfte... (E.) Alexis, fearing that the abearance of utter defencdessriess might aggravate the insolence of the Franks . . . This construction is more commonly expressed : (a) by a relative sentence : A messenger carrying a large nosegay; @in Sote^bet etnen gro§en Slumenflrau^ trug; or {P) by a coordinate sentence : The you/ng girl sat at a table by the mndow hemming a beautifid Icerchief ; Sag (unge 3»abd^en fo^ am genjlerttf^^en anb fiitttttte ein f^oneg SEut^tetn ; (Im.) or (y) by the attributive construction (see § 444) : A house standing by the river; ^vx am glu^e {iettenbe^ ^ani. §§438,439.] The Participles. 337 438. English Present Participle in Adverbial Clauses. Such clauses are expressed in German by a subordinate sentence beginning with a conjunction. (1) Causal. Conjunctions, ba, t»et( ; The river being too deep, we were obliged, to ride to the ford. 2)a ber g(u§ ju tief war, mugten wtr nctt^ ber gurtj> retten. (2) Tempmal. Conjunctions, oXi, nac^bem, t'nbem : Going down the street I met him. ate tc^ bte ©tra^e l^iituntergtng, fcegegnete tc^ t'fttn. Having finished his lecture he sat down. 2llg (na^bem) er fetnen SBovtvag teenbigt patte, fe|te er |t^. On hearing the report of a gun. SIB t^ einen ©^ug fatten ^iirte . . . Note. — Hence elliptical clauses like : when standing, while talking, are translated : ot6 t^ (er, etc.) jltinb, (oa^vent \^ (er, etc.) fVra(^. 439. English Gerundive. (i) Genitive with of. In German the infinitive with pi : An opportwnity of proving his innocence. ©ne Oelegen^eit fetne Unfc()iilb pt 6ett«ctfen. My master has the pleasure of ma/rchvng against yow 3»etn ^m W *»« ^xiwl^i gegen euve geinbe ju Steven. (G.) Beware of thinking. $fite bi^ 5tt benlen. y 338 Rules of Syntax. [Chap. XXIV. (2) Dative with to [rare) or from (when implying deprivation, of, § 379 '), also the infinitive with JU : / vnll not consent to interrupting him. 5ify mtti nt^t einwilltgen, i^n ju untcrtre^en. / was prevented from ■writing, 3i^ Wat (baron) Betjinbcrt, ju fijtciicn. (3) With other Prepositions. Expressed in German by a compound of ba (babitrt^, barauf, etc.) and (a) a dependent sentence beginning with tuff, or (6) an infinitival clause : the former when each clause has a separate subject, the latter when the subject is the same in both : I insist upon the defendant's stating. 3d^ befle^e barauf, bap bet Slngeflagtc angt'eW. F insist upon your stating. 3^ fccjicpe barauf, bap @tc angtim, I insist upon stating. 5^ believe barauf, onjugeSen! Note. — It is evident that the noun (often a possessive case) in the latter clause becomes the subject of the dependent sentence, and that the possessive adjective pronoun. becomes a personal pronoun in the nominative (see above). On =barauf,2 bap or barauf, ju By =baburc^, bop babur^, p With =bamit, bap bamtt, JU In =barin, bap bartn, ju op =baii>on, bap baoon, ju * What cause vHthholds you then to mourn for him (i.e. from mourning)? {Julius Caesar.) ' This, of course, depends upon what preposition the German verb takes, e.g. : to laugh at . , . =Iac^en tmruSer, tup. ' Not the of of the genitive, for which see § 439 (i), but the of required by certain verbs, such as : speaJc of, read of, etc. § 439.] The Participles. 339 baran, ju bagegen, ju anfiatt, p ofne, ju They thought they might safely count upon his ob- structing the passage of the river. To =ba5u, bag or At =baran, bog Against =bagegen, bog Instead o/=otl|iott, bog Without =o'^ne, bog 3Kon gtoubte tntt @t(i^er* |)eit barauf xii^MXi ju f onnen, bttft er etnen iltergong fiber ben glug evfc^weren werbe. (Hoffmann.) Sg gelong ipm ti(tt»ut(^ in boS Snnere beg J£)au[eg ju fommen, ba|f er bie 2:^uve ertrod^. SfJoe^ t^rem Sobe fonb er etnen buftern Oenug baritt, bo6 !otxi\i6jt btefeg SBcrptt* nt'lfel ft^ unb anbern i>9tiUi flcacn. (Fk.) @te fpre^en bation, nttr 8M §elfe«. (P. Heyse.) 3c^ ttjogte mein ?ekn baran, fte l^ctttttSsui^oIen. 3(^ :^6re bt(^ on, oi^nc bi^ 5tt tttttcrftreii^en. (G.) ^^oie. — The preposition ia constantly omitted for brevity's sake : 3(^) Sin evjtcut, tie SRoSjitic^t ju ^oren (3c^ Sin koruScv crfceut). / am delighted to hear the news. ®r mat SefiljjSfttgt, ten aSagen aijuldtcn (Si tonr bamit iefe^iafligt). He loas occwjiiet^ j» vmloading the cart. For constructions like "I heard him singing,'' etc., see § 429, c. He succeeded in getting into the interior of the house by breaking open the door. After her death he found a sort of gloomy enjoyment in picturing to himself and others all that was tender in this eon- You speak of helping me. I risked my life in getting her out. I listen to you without in- terrupting you. 340 The Parts of Speech. [Chap. XXIV. 440. He comes running, etc. — The English present participle after "to come" and "to stand" is expressed in German by the perfect participle : (& lorn gelauf en, he came running. ©gmont fatit nttt Stnigen auf ben IKarft aeciiten. (G.) 5Wit wejmut^igcm ^crjcn ftanb cr auf feincm ©tab eeie^nt. With a heavy heart he stood leaning upon his staff. (L. ) Similarly after jt|en : SSor «tncm gtogen gtuget fa§ etn junget aWaiiti, ben arm auf ba« Siotenputt fleftii^i unb ben Sopf in bte $onb geiegt Before a large grand piano there sat a young man, leaning his arm on the music-stand, and with his head resting in Ids hand. (Hacklandee.) This construction is, no doubt, elliptical for inbent er aar ftet in jwei longen, nttt bunten Siinbern burtttiloc^tenen 36))fen fiber ben Sluden 5inab. (Haum.) Her hair fell in two long tails intertwisted with coloured ribbons dovm over Tier bacJc.^ {Exercise 115.] ' This construction is common in newspapers and in the official style, but a frequent use of it is to be deprecated. Avoid a long- winded conglomeration bke the following : ®in tonges, ntekrigeS, mit einer Slngal^t Bon tcketief^lagenen, l^odjite^nigen, ))5anto|}ifd!)or ta^m unb iot^ ^al^fit. She was lame, notwithstanding she helped. Hence in a flat contradiction, with or without ja : ®te Jobcii ijn naturti(^ nti$t mttgcnommcn ? (3a) Soi^. Foa have taken him with yon, of course ? Tes, indeed, I have. (6) Surprise, nnexpectgdness : "surely": X)ag tfl boi^ nt($t ber berii^mte @taatSmann? Surely that is not the celebrated statesman t (£r muf bo* fcjr cgoiflift^ fcin. (c) "indeed," "reaUy": Sad miifTcn ©ie boi^ mit cigenen Stugen anfejen. (Chamisso.) Yov, must really look at that . . . 2)er erfle ©c^ritt tnu^ bodl gei^an fetn. (L.) The first step must indeed be taken. Sir orbetten freilic^ ioiit im ©e^eimen. (P. Heyse.) It is ti-ue we do indeed work in secret. 'Dai iiJ bii* ju arg. T/iat is really too bad. The Particles. 345 {d) It is often very nnemphatic : Sa0. wax *o(ij bie namttc^e Sloii^t. (Sch.) Tliat was the same night, was it not? / really think I feel too unwell, ©ag iflboiis tcincr Unitnn. / must say that is mere nonsense. (e) In indirect questions, nearly = nt(^t Wajt ? {n'est-ce pas ?) ©ie tDcrlicn bo« jettig fommcn. You will come early, won't you I ©teitnli!>o«tt)0jl? (L.) Fott a/re well, are you not ? (/) In exclamations : aBore i(5 boi^ fetbjl bet ®cn«olI TTomW / «)ere tAe general myself! ig) It emphasises the imperative : $i)rcn ®te Soi^ nur. (Sch.). Do just listen. ®c5en @ie bor^ nii^it fo f^nett. Oo not gro so/ast. @o cUcn ©ie bo«, mein graulcin. (L.). aTAeji do Aarry. {h) " after aU" (often with einmal): Also: Sllfo ©ie ptib Soi^ QiMiii^ anflelangt. /So yott arrived safely after all. ^elfen lonnen ©ie mir bcr^ ni(^t. (P. Heyse.) After aU, you know, you can't help me aei^boi^ cinmalbiiTlMn. (L.) After aUitis the mother. 346 Appendix A. (3) e6c«. General idea : correspondence, coincidence : (n fei^t tangc t>«. That is now a very long time ago, dt if} fi^on um 8 U$r audgegangen> He went out as early as 8 o'clock. 350 Appendix A. It often begins a sentence : €4011 in fetner Stnb^ett. As early as in his childhood. Si^ott am SJote ^ictteit fie an. Tl^ey stopped as soon as (they had reached) the gats. (b) "ever": ©inb jie fijon in Scrlin gewefen? Have you ever been in Berlin ? (c) Assurance, "no doubt," "never fear" : gg wixb i^m fifton gelingcn. He witt succeed, never fear. ©ic werbcn fii^ f i^on bort tttffcn. No doubt they witi meet there. (d) Less than might be anticipated, " very " (different from ebtn, very ; see this) : ed^on ber ©ebanfe tx^i)XiH mid). The very thought terrifies me. ®*mi atlein bie feltfame ^J^antaite, bet ©crc^tigfeit tin fo merlwurbigeg Opfer ju bringcn, fonnte 3Jcij genug fur i^n iaitn, felbfl feincn SBater ju ftiitjen. (Sch.) The very fancy alone of making sveh a remarkable sacrifice to justice, miglii have charm enough for him to depose even his father. (e) Concessive,' " I admit " : T)ai ifl f(9an ri^ttg, ahtx . . . That is coirect, I admit, but . . , Sillon gut! All right, that will do. (/) In a sentence like : ob mon i}r f«Oii gefagt 5ot (L.) the f(^)On belongs to the 06 : ob^(^On=aUhough ; but it is better not to divide these words. The Particles. 351 (9) Sonft. General idea : something different, under some other different con- dition. (o) " formerly " : ©t Wax f onft fejr flfif ifl. -ffe ^sed to be very industrious. (6) "usually," "generally," "at other times, why not now?" "in other ways " : et i^ fonft ein guter ©cfcHf^aftcr. He is usually (or in other ways) a good companion. Su bifl f onft nie fo traurtg. You are not generally so sad. Ste f onft fo frietfamcn Sfirgcr. (Ribhl.) The citizens, at other times so peaceful. SBieliefcS fonft ah'i (L.) How did it pass off in other ways ? (c) As an adverbial coniunction it= " else," " or else " : Seeitcn ©tc jt^, f onft werten ©te ju fpat fcmmcn. Mahe haste, or else you will be too late, (10) SSo^I (sometimes spelt tool). General idea : doubt, possibility. (o) In indirect questions, "I suppose," or M'es<-cei9as? 3^ bin alfo too^I bci S^nen. (L.) / suppose I am still at your house. ©ie ftnb too^l untgcjogcn? You have changed house, have you not ? ©r ifl tto^l ic^t gonj itJieber^ctgeiieHt. / suppose he is now quite recovered. ©ubtH wo^il ffbt*ungrig. / dare say you are very hungry. 352 Appendix A. (S) Concessive, "may be," "it is true" : @t tji tDo^l (in fe^r gefc^etiei Wlam, bO(^ tiaue t($ i^m nt^t. He may be a very dever man, but I donH trust him. o au$ t($ etnem !D!anne ^atte gefalten fonnen. (P. Heysb.) / dare say there was a time when I too might have pleased a man. 0(l)), vjon't you (tvo^I)? 1 This yearning after an accnmnlated series of particles is exem- plified in the German boy's English essay on "Time is money." "Time is money," he began, " verifies itself in the land of its arising already since a long time always again afresh " (!) Onomatopoetic Words. 353 APPENDIX B. Onomatopoetic Words. " The sound mtist seem an echo to the sense." — Pope. n, to groan. Slolen, to bleat, low. Sraufcn, to roar {of wind), boil, foam {of water, etc.). Srutten, to bellow, low. Srummcn, to growl {of cattle, bears, etc.), to bmz {of flies), to grumble. gtaifcrn, to flicker. ©aiferii, to cackle; baS ©egatfer, cackling. ©irten, to coo. ©turfctt, to cluck {of hens). ©tunjen, to grunt {of pigs, etc.). f)Uf(^en, to glide noiselessly along. ^Ujlen, to cough. Sau^jen, to shout with joy. (Suden), to itch. M6)em, to titter; ba3 ©elic^er, tittering. Mafpen.to clap, flap, clatter, rattle. Stop pern, to rattle, clatter {of the mill) ; to chatter {of the, tedh) ; Stapperfc^tangc, rattlesnake. Slatfe^en, to crack {a whip), to dap {hands), to gossap ; baS @ef(atf(i&. Sltmpetn for Slampern, to jingle, tinkle (on musical instruments); Silixa'^zxti, jingling. S.\\XUV, to clash, clank {steel, etc.), clink {glass, etc.); bflS ©ettttre. Snaden, to crack {nuts), to snap. Snattcn, to crack; mtt ber f eitfi^e fnatten, to smack a whip. Snarten, to creak {of doors, wheels, etc.). Snajlern and Snattcrn, to gnash, to crackle. (Snaufern), to pinch, to screw (i.e. to be stingy); Snaufev, "screw," miser; fnaufertg. (Snautfc(;en), to crumple. Snttfetl, to break with u, snap, to snap; bCt SnidS, curtsey. Snidern, same as fnaufern. Snirf^En, to gnash the teeth. Snijiern, to crackle {of frozen snow, salt inflre, etc.). Snitfcrn, to crackle (louder than ini^ixn— of papers, etc.). Rm^m, to cuf {hit). ^nuwen, to growl, to snarl {of dogs, bears, etc.) : hence of men. (Srtgetn), to scribble; iaS ®i' frt^et, Sattftl, to lisp, to speak imper- fectly. 354 Appendix B. !Katf(^Cn, to squash ; in 3)Jotf(^, Tliauen, to mew. 3Kif$maf(i^, in, mishmash. STOurren, to murmur, to growl, to mutter; mixxtifi^ , peevish. (SRiefcn), to sneeze. ^atf(^, splash, flop (noise of falling on a moist surface). ^atf^en, see ptatfi^cn. ^fufc|en, (i) same as ^uft^eit; (2) hence to dabble in, bet ffufc^et. ^iepen, to cheep [of young birds). ^Sfappern, to chatter, to tattle; ba^ ©eptapper. ^tatfe^en, ; ?|3Iatf(^crn, ^Ia|cn, to burst {of glass, com- pressed air, etc.). ^Ottern, to bounce, to bluster, to make a racket. ^rafTelll, to crackle (of Hamtes, etc.); bag ©epraiTet. ^uffcn, to puff (with the breath). iJSltjJctl, to "blow," pant. duafen, to quack, to croak; bflS Ocquflfc. Quetf(^en, to squeeze. Ouielen, to squeak; iaS ©cquiefe. SRflffcIn, tig, §0$mut, »crjnutli$, WCttDoH, etc., as also in the termination >t^um, now to be spelt 'tum, as 3trtum, gurflentum. In the termination now spelt -ni? one S is dropped when undeclined, but with a suffix the ff is retained, as SennttttS, pi. Senntntffe j ®Ui(^niS, gen. ®lei$nifre«. The infinitiTe termination of foreign verbs is now fixed as 'itxtn (not .ircn), as forticren, regteren, conben|teren, etc. Note also the following : New. Old. New. Old. tot^ tcbt tat iaax tiitcn tobtcn its^alb beg^olb SBrot Srob fceeiwcgcn begroegen SBcHfalen SBcjip^aTen wesjotb weeialb famt famntt wcSwegcn wegwegen |)crli |>cerb (often) inbeS inbcf ^erte ^CCrbC (often) unttrbcS untetbef ©^of ©I^OOg (often) 8og 8oog Capital Letters are to be used at the beginning of all nouns and words used as such, also in titles, as : ^auS, Seutf($ (the language), bo« Sefen, SBil^elm ber SSierte, bag Sonigtic^e 5Ktntilcrium. Small Letters are to be used at the beginning of all other parts of speech, and in the case of nouns used as such : e.g. ntorgeitd, abenb^, etn bif(tien, baS ubrtge, jcmonb, aHe^; and in expressions like: Icib tjun, tS ifl f^abe, infionb fc|cn, tett nc^men, ot^t gebcti, jum beflcn iabtn, grof unb tlctn, jung unb alt, ojne i»citcrc3, etc. ^ But the noun death is Sob ; toMid;, fatal. INDEX. The numbers refer to the paragraphs. vSVf meaning of, 240, i. abtX, 302 ; position of, 303. about (prep.), 296. above (prep. ), 296. absolute superlative, 93. absolute accusative, 384. accusative for possess, adj., 383. accusative : of price, measure, and weight, 385 ; of time, 386 ; of space, 387 ; double, 388 ; cog- nate, 390 ; with adjectives, 391 ; ace. and infinitive, 392, accusative and genitive with verbs, 371. accusative and dative with verbs, 375. across (prep.), 296. address, pronoun of, 153. adjective : declension of, 69, 70 ; declension with def. art., etc., 71; with indef. art., 72; when alone, 73 ; not declined, 74 ; in oel, 'tt drop the t, 77 ; in -en, 78 ; used for nouns, 80, 81 ; after i5iel, etc., 81 note, 2; from names of towns, 82; suffixes (meaning of), 83 6.; comparison of, 84 seq. ; how declined in comparison, 97; with preposi- tions, 297; with the genitive, 368; with the dative, 376; with the accusative, 391 ; attri- butive use of, with adjuncts, 444. adjective-pronouns, 128 seq. ; de- monstrative, 129 ; determina- tive, 132 ; relative, 135 ; posses- sive, 138. adverb, 274 seq. ; comparison of, 276; of time, 280; of place, 282 ; of degree, 284 ; of affirma- tion, negation, doubt, etc., 285; interrogative, 286 ; order of, 335. adverbial conjunctions, 323, adverbial locutions with gen., 364. adverbial genitive of time, 366. after (prep.), 296. against (prep.), 296. ago, 296. aU, 113. all that, 175. Ot(e«, 184; for "anything," 186. aKetn (conj.), 304. along (prep.), 296. amid (prep. ), 296. ^58 Index. i^ The numbers refer to the paragraphs. among (prep.), 296. an (prep.), 294, i. an<, meaning of, 240, 2. anomalies in spelling of verbs, 205. anomalons plurals, 38. another, 127 6. any, 127 a. anybody, anything, 186. apposition, 354 ; expressed by jit, 855 ; with proper names, 357. article with names of persons, 55 ; definite in German, no art. in English, 344; in English, not in German, 345 ; def . in German, indef . in English, 346 ; preferred to possess, adj., 347; position of, 348. as (how to translate), 310. as far as, 296. as large again, 94. at (prep.), 296. au$, meanings of, Appendix A, 1. aucj), with correlative, 177 tiotR. auf (prep.), 294, ^. auf', meaning of, 240, 3. ^ The numbers refer to the paragraphs. comparison of adjectives, 84-97 ; of equality, 91 ; of inferiority, 92 ; irregular, 96 ; declension of, 97. comparison of adverbs, 27G. compound plurals, 37. compounds of irreg. verbs, regular, 224. compound verbs, 233 seq. compound separable prefixes, 243 seg. compound conjunctions, 319. compound sentences, order in, 342. compound verbs with dative, 374. concord, 349 seg. conjunction, kinds of, 299 ; co- ordinative, 300 ; subordinative, 306 ; relative, 308 ; compound, 319; adverbial, 323; with sub- junctive, 422. co-ordinative conjunctions, 300. correlative pronouns, 176. could have, etc. , 402. countries, etc., of the world, 51. Sft/ compounds of (baran, etc.), for personal pronouns, 148. bat'/ meaning of, 240, 6. dark-blue, etc., 81 noU. tia@, omitted, 338. date, how expressed. 111. dative with verbs, 372, 374, and accus. with verbs, 375; with adjectives, 376 ; with reflexive verbs, 378 ; of deprivation, 379 ; of recipient, 380; of purpose, 380 note ; ethic, 381 ; for pos- sessive adjective, etc. , 383. declension of noun, etc, see noun, etc. definite article declined, p. 13. (See also under "article." demonstrative a'djeotive, 129. demonstrative pronoun, 163 ; used for pers. pron., 164; used for possessive adj. , 143. betin (conj.), 305. bcr, tote, ba3, etc., used for de- monstr. adj., 131. ber, bte, baS, relative, for cor- relative, 177 note. derivative verbs, 227. derivative and compound verbs with dat., 374. berjentge, etc. (adj.), 132; (pron.), 166; correlative, 176. berfelfce (adj.), 132; (pron.), 166; used for pers. pron., 167. determinative adj., 132; pron., 166. biefet, etc., declined, p. 14. distinctive numerals, 102. bO(^, meanings of. Appendix A, 2. double accusative, 388. double genders, 68. double plurals, 30. double prefixes, 246. down (prep. ), 296. burcf) (prep.), 290, i. buries, meaning of, 249 a. biitfeit, conjugation, 199; meaning of, 396. 360 Index. W The numbers refer to the paragraphs. ^biXtf meanings of, Appendix A, 3. citt; eitie, Cin, etc., declined, p. 14. ein (numeral), declined, 100. cin«, meaning of, 240, 7. cinanber, 161. cincr son Beiben, 126. eintg, 121. citijtg, 104.1 either (adj. pron.), 126. elliptical interrogation, 828 note. elliptical sentences {what to do, etc.), 435. elliptical use of auxiliaries, 401. empot=, meaning of, 240, 8, , meaning of, 232, 5; separ- able and inseparable, 239. mit (prep.), 289, 4. mit«, meaning of, 240, 13. mixed conjugation, 209. mogen, conjugation, 199; meaning of, 395. moods, 192 ; uses of subjunctive, 413 ; imperative, 423 ; infini- tive, 427. multiplicatives, 104. ntuffcn, conjugation, 199 ; use of, 397. Tlixti, gender of compounds, 65. 9lac^ (prep.), 289, 5. tiac^'/ meaning of, 240, 14. no^lKprep.), 289, 12. nCL^t, comparison, 88. neben (prep.), 294, 6. nebU (prep.), 289, 13. neither (adj. pron.), 126. neuter verbs of motion, 251. 364 Index. The numbers refer to the paragraphs. passive of verbs of naming, etc., 389. passive construction, with verba of seeing, etc. , 430. people, synonyms, 30 note. personal pronoun, 145 seq. ; agree- ment of, 150 ; repeated in rela- tive sentences, 170. persons, names of. See proper nouns, photograph, 42 note. places, names of. See proper nouns. plural of courtesy, 353. position of adverbs, 335. possession expressed by dative, 142. possessive adjective declined, 138 (see also p. 14) ; expressed in German by def. art., 347 ; pro- noun, 182, postponement of subject, 155 ; of subjective sentence, 158 j of verb, 337. predicative genitive, 363. prefixes, inseparable, 232 ; separ- able, 238 ; simple separable, 240 ; noun and adj. prefixes, 242 ; compound, 243 ; double, 246 ; separable and inseparable, 247. preposition, 287 ff. ; with geni- tive, 288 ; with dative, 289 ; with accusative, 290 ; with dat. and ace, 291 ; used figuratively, 293; verbs, adj., and nouns with, 297 ; idioms with, 298. present, for future, 404 ; historic, 405 ; of incomplete action, 406 ; for imperative, 426. progressive form, 403. pronoun of address, 153. pronouns, personal, 145 ; reflexive and reciprocal, 160 ; demonstra- tive, 163 ; determinative, 166 ; relative, 168 ; correlative, 176 j interrogative, 178 ; possessive, 182 ; indefinite, 184. pronouns, order of, 330, 331. proper nouns : names of places, 49, 50 ; names of persons, 52-58. Recipeocal pronoun, 161. reflexive pronoun, 160. reflexive verb; conjugation, 256; with genitive, 370; with dative, 378. regular (weak) verb conjugated, 202. reiterative numerals, 103. relative adjective, 135; pronoun, 168 ; not omitted, 172. relative conjunctions, 308. repetition of pers. pron. in rela- tive sentence, 170. roll (of bread), 23 note. round (prep.), 296. i^ammt (prep.), 289, 13. ©C^merj declined, 12 note. f($On, meanings of, Appendix A, 8. Index. 365 The. numbers refer to the paragraphs. fetn, conjugated, 196 ; or ttjerbett, in passive, 212 ; with JU, 433 ; auxiliary of neuter verbs, 253. feit (prep.), 289, 6. UM (fetber), 154. separable verbs, 234 ff. ; prefixes, list of, 238 ; meaning of simple, 240 seq. ; compound, 243 seq. separable and inseparable verbs, 247. ft^, 160 ; for reciprocal pron., 162. simple regular verb conjugated, 202. simple separable prefixes, 240 seq. simultaneous action, 317. since (conj.), how to translate, 313. so (conj.), inserted before com- pound sentences, 342. fotc^er, declined, 132, 134 (see also p. 14). foUen, conjugation, 199 ; meaning of, 398. some and any, 127 a. fonbcr (prep.), 290, 5. fonbcrn, 302. song, synonyms, 8 note. fonfl, meanings of, Appendix A, 9. strong verbs. See irregular verbs, subject postponed, 155. subjunctive, use of, 413; optative, 415 ; in oratio obliqua, 416 ; after conjunctions, 422. subordinative conjunctions, 306. subordinate sentences, order in, 337. substantive. See noun. superlative, two forms, 85 ; abso- lute, 93 ; adverbial, 278, 279. Tenses, 193. than with comparative, 90. that (conj. ), how to translate, 314. the— the, 318, 320. the larger the better, 94. %^tii, gender of compounds, 66. there is (how to translate), 263. through (prep.), 296. time, synonyms, 23 note. time of day, 105. titles, use of, 59. to (prep.), 296. to within, 296. towards (prep.), 296. iXhCt (prep.), 294, 7. u6et=, meaning of, 249 b. nbet^aupt, 284 note. um (prep.), 290, 6. Utn=/ meaning of, 249, e. um— JU, 428. under (prep. ), 296. Ullfst/ declined, 138. untct(prep.), 294, 8. Untet«, meaning of, 249 d. until, 296. up to, 240, 20 note, 296. 366 Index. <®" The numbers refer to the paragraphs. S3e«», meaning of, 232, 8. verb, classified, 190 ; auxiliary, 194-198; simple regular, 202; conjugated interrogatively, 203 ; negatively, 204; anomalies in spelling of, 205 ; mixed, 209 ; passive conjugated, 211 ; use o£ passive, 212 ; irregular, 216 ; factitives, 225 ; derivative and compound, 226 seq. ; inseparable, 230 ; compound separable, 223 seq. ; compounded with noun or adj., 242; separable and in- separable, 247 ; neuter of mo- tion, 251 ; reflexive, 256 ; re- flexive in German only, 260 ; impersonal, 261, verbal noun, 436. verbs with prepositions, 297. verbs of naming and appointing, 356; of naming and teaching, 388 ; passive of ditto, 389. verbs with nominative, 358 ; with genitive, 369; with aocus. and gen., 371; with dative, 372; with dat. and accus., 375. tttct, 117; adjective after, 81, note 2. vocative as antecedent to relative, 170. voices, 192 ; middle voice, 238. WU', meaning of, 232, 8 ; separ- able and inseparable, 249 e. t)OK (adj.), construction with, 391 son (prep.), 289, 7. [note. BOri/ or genitive, 365. »0r (prep.), 294, 9. WX'i meaning of, 240, 17. sESflS/ used as relative, 175; cor- relative, 177 ; , how declined, 177 ; genitive of, 180. 'maS for ttwaS, 188. was fiir ein, 135, 133. mai fur einer, 178. weak verbs. See regular verbs. tt)eg«, meaning of, 240, 18. =H)egen, with pers. pron., 149. stBeifc, adverbs with, 275. mi(^ex, declined, p. 14; relative adj., 135; relative pron., 168; mid)n or ber (relative), 169; interrogative, 178. WCnig, adjective after, 81, note 2 ; declined or not, 117. Wcntl, omitted, 312, 321. WtX, correlative, 177; how de- clined, 177. tBerbcn, conjugated, 197 ; idioms with, 198 ; in passive, 212 ; omission of as auxiliary, 411. what to do, etc., how translated, 435. when (how to translate), 309. tt)ibcr(prep.), 290, 3. tt)tt)ei:», meaning of, 232, 10. tt)ieber», meaning of, 240, 19 ; separable and inseparable, 249/. =H)itten, with pers. pron., 149. wish expressed by inversion, 333. Wiffen, conjugation, 210. Index. 367 1^ The numbers refer to the paragraphs. with (prep.), 296. without (prep.), 296. tt)0, used for relative, 174. t»0 (=,bei, etc.), relative, 171; in- terrogative, 181. WO^I, 277 ; meanings of. Appen- dix A, 10. rootlen, conjugation, 199; meaning of, 399. work, synonyms, 23 note. YoTJ (how to translate), 153. " yours truly," 279 note. 3et5, meaning of, 232, 7. 3terat^, 12 note. IM'i meaning of, 240, 20. 5U(prep.), 289, 8. jU/ with infinitive, 427 ; omitted, 429 ; omitted in certain expres- sions, 432 ; used with Jflten fein, and bleibcn, 433. jufolge (prep.), 289, 14. junai^il (prep.), 289, 12. JWifl^en (prep.), 294, 10. RIYINGTON'S EDUCATIONAL LIST iOiXiOOCOGPff^C^^ Catena Classkorum: Aristophanes. The Acharnians and the Knights, 4J.— The Wasps, 3f. (d. —The Clouds, 31. 6rf. Dbmosthbnes. The Olynthiacs, m. 6d. —The Philippics, 31. — De Falsa Legatione, 6s.— De Corona, 5ff. Hesodotus. Boo^t I., 61.— Book II., Homer. Iliad. Books I. — XII. 6j. Horace. Odes, Carmen Seculare, and Epodes. 7J. 6*t — Odes. Bpok^I. — ly. separately, K. 6rf. each." ' Isqcrates. Ad Demonicum et Pane- ' gyricus. . 4; . (id, Juvenal. 5j. Fersius. 35. 6<^ Sophocles. Electra, 31. 6rf'.— Ajax, 3J. iid. I Tacitus; Histories. I. and II., 6s.— III., IV., and v., 6f. Terence. Andria and Eunuchus, 4^.6//. ■Or separately, Andria, 35, .firf. — Eunucnus, 3s. . Thucvoides. History. I. and II., 6s. —III. and IV., 6s. Scenes from: Greek Plays. By A. gdgwick. xs. 6d. each. Aristophanes. The Clouds.- The Frogs. The Knights. Plutus. Euripides. Iphigenia in Tauris. The Cyclops. Ion. Electra. Alcestis. Bacchse. Hecuha. Medea. Easy Selections from Plato. By A. Sidgwick. 35. 6d. Cicero. DeAmicitiS. By A. Sidgwick. Exercises in Latin EleCiac Verse. By C. G. Gepp. 3*. 6d. A First History of EncSlahd. By Louise Creighton. 2s. 6d. A Short History of Enqland, from the Earliest Times to the' Present Say. By C. Ransome. 31. 6d. Latin Texts. Vergil, fteneid. Books I.. II.; III., IV., v., VII., VIII., IX., arfleacK Books VI., X., XI„ XII., 3* each. Vergil. Georgics. Books I,— IV., »/, . each. Vergil. Bucolics, ti. Th? above in one volume, 'a*. 6d.. C^GSAR. Ce Bella Gallicfil Books I„ ' V.,VIIyVIII.,3rf.each. Books IT.,' III., IV; VL, aoT. each. The above in one volume, xs. 6d. Annotated Latin Texts. Cgsas. Books I.— VI., I*, each. Greek Texts. Xenophon. Anabasis. Books!.— VII., 6d. each. Annotated Greek Texts. ; Xenophon. Anabasis. Books I. — VII., ' zj. each. ' Select Plays of Shakspere. Rugby Edition. " As You Like It, m. Macbeth, m. Hamlet, 2f. 6d. King-Lear, ^.^d. RoMBO AND Juliet, 2J. King Henry the Fifth, 21. A MiDSUMmER Night's Dream, 2f. King John, 2f . CORIOLANUS, 2f . 6d. ThE TEM- PEST, 2J. ■ , A History of Englixnd. By J. F. Bright. Period I.— MEbl^vAL Monarchy : A.D. 4-40 — 1485^ 4^. 6d. Period II.— Personal Monarchy: A.D. 1485- 1688. Sf. ,y;t Period III. — CONSTITUTIOl^L MON. archy: A.D. 1689— 1837.. 7*.^ 6rf, Period IVi— Growth of BeIto^racy ! A.D. 1837— 1S80. 6Sf '*^>' , J, Historical Biographies, '^ Simon db Montport. xs. 6di - The Black Prince, m. 6d.. '» , Sir Walter Ralegh. 3si Oliver Cromwell. ^.'6d. DuKB OF Marlborough. 3;. 6d. Duke of Wellington. 3s. 6d. : Waterloo Place, Pall Mall, London. 3 ENGLISH SCHOOL CLASSICS Edited by FRANCIS STORR, B.A., CHIEF MASTER OF MODEHM SUBJECTS IN MERCHANT TAVCOKS' SCHOOL. THOMSON'S SEASONS : Winter. With an Introduction to the Series. By J. F. Bright, D.D. ij. 'COWPER'S TASK. By Francis Storr, B.A. as. J or in Three Parts, gd. each. COWPER'S SIMPLE POEMS, ' By Francis Storr, B.A. u. SCOTT'S LAY OF THE LAST MINSTREL. „ ,„ , , ,, By J. Surtees Phillpotts, M.A., Head Master of Bedford School. 2j. cX; or in Four Parts, gd. each. SCOTT'S LADY OF THE LAKE. _ . By R. W. Taylor, M.A., Head Master of Kelly College, Tavistock, sj. ; or in Three Parts, gd. each. SCOTT'S MARMION. By F. S. Arnold, M.A., Assistant Master at Bedford School. 21. 6d. Canto I., gd. ;, Cantos II. III. IV., m. ; Cantos V. VI.; is. NOTES TO SCOTT'S WAVERLEY. By H. W. Eve, M.A., Head Master of University College School,-London. IS. ; Waverlev and Notes, 2s. 6d. BACON'S ESSAYS. Complete Edition. By Francis Storr, B.A. and C. H. Gibson, M.A. 3s. 6d. TWENTY OF BACON'S ESSAYS, By Francis Storr, B.A. is. SIMPLE POEMS. ■, , „ „ „ . By W. E. MuLLiNS, M.A., Assistant Master at MSrlborough College. Sd. SELECTIONS FROM W^ORDSWORTH'S POEMS. By H. H. Turner, B.A., late Scholar of Trinity College, Cambridge, is. WORDSWORTH'S EXCURSION: The Wanderer. By H. H. Turner, B.A. isr MILTON'S PARADISE LOST. By Francis Storr, B.A. Book I., gd. Book II., gd. MILTON'S L' ALLEGRO, IL PENSEROSO, AND LYCIDAS. By Edward Storr, M.A, late Scholar of New College, Oxford, is. SELECTIONS FROM THE SPECTATOR, By Osmund Airy, M.A., late Assistant Master at Wellington College, is. BROWNE'S RELIGIO MEDICI'. By W. P. Smith, M.A., Assistant Master at Winchester College, is. GOLDSMITH'S TRAVELLER AND DESERTED VILLAGE. By C. Sanxev, M.A., Head Master of Bury St. Edmund's Grammar School. IS. , EXTRACTS from GOLDSMITH'S VICAR OF WAKEFIELD. By C. Sankey, M.A. is. POEMS SELECTED from the WORKS OF ROBERT BURNS. - By A. M. Bell, M. A., Balliol College,. Oxford, q^ MACAULAY'S ESSAYS : . MOORE'S LIFE OF BYRON. By Francis Storr, B.A. od. BOSWELL'S' LIFE OF JOHNSONi By Francis Storr, B.A. gd. ■ . HALLAM'S .'CONSTITUTIONAL HISTO;iy. By H. F. Boyd. is. SOUTHEY'S LIFE OF NELSON. By W. E. MutLiNS, M.A. 2s. 6d. GRAY'S POEMS. SELECTION FROM LETTERS, with LIFE by JOHNSON. By Francis Storr, B.A. is. Waterloo Place, Pall Mall, London, 4